Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
2021 CHEROKEE
OWNER’S MANUAL
21_KL_OM_EN_USC
First Edition
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2021 CHEROKEE
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................8
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 14
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................85
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................108
5 MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................180
6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................262
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................... 327
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................363
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ..............................................................................................411
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .................................................................................................... 420
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................424
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
Symbols Key............................................................ 9
ROLLOVER WARNING ........................................... 9
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...............................10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ........10
Symbol Glossary...................................................10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ......................................................................14
Key Fob......................................................... 14
SENTRY KEY ..........................................................17
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................18
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) —
If Equipped ................................................... 18
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
(If Equipped)................................................. 19
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .........................20
How To Use Remote Start ...........................21
Remote Start Cancel Message ................... 22
To Exit Remote Start Mode ......................... 22
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped ................................................... 22
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped .................................................. 22
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped.............................. 23
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.......23
To Arm The System ..................................... 23
To Disarm The System ............................... 24
Rearming Of The System............................. 24
Security System Manual Override .............. 24
DOORS .................................................................. 24
Manual Door Locks...................................... 24
Power Door Locks ....................................... 25
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry .......... 26
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit................. 28
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ........ 28
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors .................................................. 29
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED... 29
Programming The Memory Feature............ 30
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To
Memory ........................................................ 30
Memory Position Recall............................... 31
SEATS ................................................................... 31
Manual Adjustment
(Front Seats) — If Equipped......................... 31
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............... 33
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped................................................... 35
Heated Seats — If Equipped ....................... 37
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped ........ 38
HEAD RESTRAINTS ............................................. 38
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats ... 38
Rear Head Restraints.................................. 39
STEERING WHEEL.................................................40
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............. 40
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 41
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ......................42
Introducing Voice Recognition.................... 42
Basic Voice Commands .............................. 42
Get Started................................................... 42
Additional Information................................. 43
MIRRORS ..............................................................43
Inside Rearview Mirror ................................ 43
Outside Mirrors ........................................... 44
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .................... 45
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors........................... 45
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................45
Multifunction Lever .................................... 45
Headlight Switch.......................................... 46
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped................................................... 46
High/Low Beam Switch............................... 47
Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control — If Equipped ................................. 47
Flash-To-Pass............................................... 47
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......... 47
Parking Lights .............................................. 47
Automatic Headlights With
Wipers — If Equipped................................... 48
Headlight Time Delay .................................. 48
Lights-On Reminder .................................... 48
Fog Lights — If Equipped............................. 48
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
Turn Signals .................................................49
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............. 49
Battery Saver................................................49
INTERIOR LIGHTS .................................................49
Interior Courtesy Lights ............................... 50
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .............51
Windshield Wiper Operation ....................... 52
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........... 53
Rear Window Wiper/Washer....................... 54
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped .... 54
CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................55
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions .............................................. 55
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions......................................................58
Manual Climate Controls With
A Touchscreen ............................................. 60
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped ..................................................... 63
Climate Voice Commands ........................... 64
Operating Tips ............................................. 64
WINDOWS ............................................................66
Power Window Controls............................... 66
Automatic Window Features ......................66
Reset Auto-Up ..............................................67
Window Lockout Switch .............................. 67
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 67
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED ............................................................ 68
Opening And Closing The Sunroof.............. 68
Opening And Closing The Power Shade ..... 69
Pinch Protect Feature.................................. 70
Venting Sunroof ........................................... 70
Ignition Off Operation .................................. 70
Sunroof Maintenance.................................. 70
HOOD ..................................................................... 71
Opening The Hood ....................................... 71
Closing The Hood......................................... 71
LIFTGATE ............................................................... 71
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate...................... 71
To Lock/Close The Liftgate ......................... 73
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped ............ 73
Cargo Area Features ................................... 74
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED .......................... 76
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®.................................................. 76
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....... 76
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device .............. 77
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener................................................. 77
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device ................................. 78
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button........................................................... 78
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 78
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT..............79
Storage......................................................... 79
Sun Visors ................................................... 81
AUX/USB Control — If Equipped ................. 81
Power Outlets .............................................. 82
Power Inverter — If Equipped ..................... 83
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ............84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .......................................85
Instrument Cluster Descriptions................. 87
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .......................88
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls ........................................................ 88
Oil Life Reset — If Equipped........................ 89
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ... 90
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Items............................................................. 95
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped.................................. 95
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ..................96
Red Warning Lights ..................................... 97
Yellow Warning Lights ...............................100
Yellow Indicator Lights ..............................104
Green Indicator Lights...............................104
White Indicator Lights ...............................105
Blue Indicator Lights .................................106
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ... 106
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity................................106
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ........................................................ 107
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .................................... 108
Normal Starting — Gasoline Engine..........108
Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) .........................109
Extended Park Starting..............................109
If Engine Fails To Start .............................109
After Starting..............................................109
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED........ 109
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS....... 110
PARKING BRAKE ............................................... 110
Electric Park Brake (EPB) .........................110
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION............................ 114
Key Ignition Park Interlock ........................115
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System........................................................115
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission ......115
Gear Ranges ..............................................116
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ....................120
1-Speed Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) — If
Equipped ....................................................120
2-Speed Four-Wheel Drive
(4WD) — If Equipped..................................121
Shift Positions............................................121
Shifting Procedures ...................................122
Rear Electronic Locker (E-Locker)
System — If Equipped................................122
SELEC-TERRAIN..................................................124
Description.................................................124
POWER STEERING .............................................125
STOP/START SYSTEM .......................................125
Autostop Mode...........................................125
Possible Reasons The Engine Does
Not Autostop ..............................................126
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode...........................................................126
To Manually Turn Off The
Stop/Start System .....................................127
To Manually Turn On The
Stop/Start System .....................................127
System Malfunction...................................127
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
IF EQUIPPED ......................................................128
Cruise Control — If Equipped.....................128
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) —
If Equipped.................................................130
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................................... 141
ParkSense Sensors ...................................142
ParkSense Display.....................................142
ParkSense Warning Display......................146
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........146
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System........................................................146
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............147
ParkSense System Usage Precautions....147
Side Distance Warning System ................148
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................................... 150
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System .........................151
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation ................................152
Exiting The Parking Space ........................154
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 155
LaneSense Operation................................155
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................155
LaneSense Warning Message..................156
Changing LaneSense Status.....................159
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ............. 160
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ................................ 161
VEHICLE LOADING ............................................ 162
Certification Label .....................................162
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
TRAILER TOWING .............................................. 163
Common Towing Definitions .....................164
Trailer Hitch Classification ........................166
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .........................................167
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................168
Towing Requirements................................168
Towing Tips ................................................171
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME) ................................................... 172
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ........................................................172
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel
Drive (FWD) Models...................................173
Recreational Towing —
4x4 Models With 1-Speed Power
Transfer Unit ..............................................173
Recreational Towing — 4x4 Models With
2-Speed Power Transfer Unit ....................174
DRIVING TIPS ..................................................... 177
On-Road Driving Tips .................................177
Off-Road Driving Tips.................................177
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ....................................... 180
CYBERSECURITY ............................................... 180
UCONNECT SETTINGS ....................................... 181
Customer Programmable Features ..........181
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION ..............................196
System Overview .......................................196
Drag & Drop Menu Bar..............................198
Safety And General Information ...............198
UCONNECT MODES............................................199
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................199
Radio Mode ...............................................200
Media Mode ..............................................210
Phone Mode ..............................................213
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................................................226
Android Auto™ ..........................................226
Apple CarPlay®..........................................229
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips
And Tricks...................................................231
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
IF EQUIPPED ......................................................231
Is My Vehicle Connected?.........................231
Introduction To Connected Vehicle
Services .....................................................232
Getting Started With Connected Vehicle
Services .....................................................234
Using SiriusXM Guardian™ ......................236
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™
Account.......................................................252
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQs ......................... 252
Connected Services SOS FAQs ................252
Connected Services Remote Door
Lock/Unlock FAQs ....................................252
Connected Services Roadside
Assistance FAQs .......................................253
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs .....253
Connected Services Vehicle Finder
FAQs ..........................................................253
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle
Assistance FAQs .......................................254
Connected Services Remote Vehicle
Start FAQs .................................................254
Connected Services Remote
Horn & Lights FAQs....................................255
Connected Services Account FAQs...........255
Data Collection & Privacy..........................257
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED .................. 258
Off-Road Pages Status Bar .......................258
Drivetrain....................................................259
Pitch & Roll.................................................259
Accessory Gauges .....................................259
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped ......................260
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.... 260
Regulatory And Safety Information ..........261
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ............................................ 262
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................262
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light........263
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System....263
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ........................ 273
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped .................................................273
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped............................277
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)...........................................279
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .................. 284
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....284
Important Safety Precautions ...................284
Seat Belt Systems .....................................285
Supplemental Restraint
Systems (SRS)............................................295
Child Restraints..........................................309
Transporting Pets ......................................324
SAFETY TIPS ...................................................... 324
Transporting Passengers ..........................324
Exhaust Gas ...............................................324
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................325
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle ........................326
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS........................327
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ...327
FUSES ..................................................................331
General Information ..................................331
Underhood Fuses ......................................332
Interior Fuses.............................................338
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................339
Preparations For Jacking...........................339
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage...........340
Jacking Instructions...................................341
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ...................344
Tire Service Kit Storage.............................345
Tire Service Kit Components And
Operation....................................................345
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions .........346
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit ..........348
JUMP STARTING.................................................351
Preparations For Jump Start.....................352
Jump Starting Procedure ..........................352
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY –
IF EQUIPPED ......................................................354
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .........................354
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE.............................355
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............................356
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 357
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models .............358
4x4 Models With 1–Speed Power
Transfer Unit ..............................................359
4x4 Models With 2–Speed Power
Transfer Unit ..............................................359
Recovery Strap — If Equipped...................359
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) ................................................. 360
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 360
BULB REPLACEMENT ........................................ 361
Replacement Bulbs ...................................361
Replacing Exterior Bulbs...........................362
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING .................................. 363
Maintenance Plan .....................................364
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 367
2.0L Engine ...............................................367
2.4L Engine ...............................................368
3.2L Engine ...............................................369
Checking Oil Level .....................................370
Adding Washer Fluid ................................370
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................371
Pressure Washing......................................371
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
DEALER SERVICE .............................................. 371
Engine Oil ..................................................372
Engine Oil Filter..........................................372
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ...........................373
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................374
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................375
Body Lubrication........................................377
Windshield Wiper Blades .........................378
Exhaust System ........................................381
Cooling System ..........................................382
Brake System ............................................386
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ....387
TIRES .................................................................. 388
Tire Safety Information .............................388
Tires — General Information......................395
Tire Types ...................................................399
Spare Tires — If Equipped ........................400
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ....................402
Snow Traction Devices .............................403
Tire Rotation Recommendations..............405
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................. 406
Treadwear ..................................................406
Traction Grades .........................................406
Temperature Grades .................................407
STORING THE VEHICLE .................................... 407
BODYWORK........................................................ 407
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......407
Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........408
Preserving The Bodywork..........................408
INTERIORS .........................................................409
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................409
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................409
Leather Surfaces .......................................410
Glass Surfaces ..........................................410
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER.................411
BRAKE SYSTEM..................................................411
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................411
Torque Specifications................................411
FUEL REQUIREMENTS .......................................412
2.0L Engine................................................413
2.4L And 3.2L Engines..............................413
Reformulated Gasoline ............................413
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .....................413
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles ......................................................414
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...414
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ..................414
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................414
Fuel System Cautions................................415
Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................415
FLUID CAPACITIES .............................................416
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS..................417
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...............419
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................. 420
Prepare For The Appointment ..................420
Prepare A List.............................................420
Be Reasonable With Requests.................420
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................. 420
FCA US LLC Customer Center...................420
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........420
Mexico ........................................................421
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands............421
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................421
Service Contract .......................................421
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 422
MOPAR® PARTS ............................................... 422
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 422
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................422
In Canada...................................................422
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ......................... 422
General Information.......................................... 423
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, Congratulations on purchasing your new JEEP®. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high
quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and
maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the
two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited
for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those
used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will
improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws
of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 177.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC
offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications
carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help
ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement
of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons.
For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your JEEP® best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and
care about your satisfaction.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
SYMBOLS KEY ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of
gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all
vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this
vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving
actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this
vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe
or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
WARNING!
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,
which if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
CAUTION!
An unsafe practice which may result in personal
injury or damage to the vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information
on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
1
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major
cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that
the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by
10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures
that could result in a collision, bodily injury, and/or death. It also contains
CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle.
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important
to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the
definition of each symbol. Ú page 85
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 97
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 97
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 97
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 98
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 98
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
Ú page 98
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 98
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 99
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 99
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 99
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 99
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 99
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 100
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 100
Red Warning Lights
Yellow Warning Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 100
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
Ú page 100
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 100
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 101
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 101
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 101
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 101
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 101
1
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 101
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
Ú page 102
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 102
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 102
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 102
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
Ú page 102
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
Ú page 103
Yellow Warning Lights
Yellow Indicator Lights
Active Speed Limiter Fault Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 104
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 104
4WD LOW Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 104
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 104
Green Indicator Lights
Active Speed Limiter SET Indicator Light
Ú page 104
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Vehicle Light — If Equipped
Ú page 104
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without Target
Vehicle Light — If Equipped
Ú page 104
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 104
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 104
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 105
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Ú page 105
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 105
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 105
White Indicator Lights
Active Speed Limiter Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 105
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 105
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 105
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 105
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 105
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 106
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 106
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 106
White Indicator Lights
1
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle may be equipped with a standard
ignition key fob or a keyless ignition key fob.
The standard ignition key fob operates the
ignition switch. Insert the square end of the
key fob into the ignition switch located on the
instrument panel and rotate to the desired
position. The key fob also contains an emergency
key, which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
Key Fob For Standard Ignition
Your vehicle may be equipped with a keyless
ignition key fob that supports Passive Entry,
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless Enter-N-Go
(if equipped), Remote Start (if equipped), and
power liftgate operation. This type of key fob
operates a START/STOP ignition button system.
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long
as the key fob is in the passenger compartment
Ú
page 26.
1 — PANIC Button
2 — Unlock Button
3 — Lock Button
4 — Remote Start Button
5 — Emergency Key Location
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other elec-
tronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock
the doors and liftgate from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to acti-
vate the system.
Key Fob For Keyless Ignition
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change
with the push of a button, the key fob may
have a low or fully depleted battery. A low key
fob battery can be verified by referring to the
instrument cluster, which will display direc-
tions to follow.
Improper disposal of key fob batteries may
be harmful to the environment. Please see
an authorized dealer for proper battery
disposal.
1 — Liftgate Button
2 — Unlock Button
3 — Lock Button
4 — Remote Start Button
5 — PANIC Button
6 — Emergency Key
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push the interior door unlock button on the door
panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked using the interior door
panel, and no door is opened within 60 seconds,
the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped, the secu-
rity system will arm. You can change the current
setting within the Uconnect system.
Ú
page 181.
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice
within five seconds to unlock all the doors and
the liftgate. To lock all the doors and the liftgate,
push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals
will flash and the illuminated entry system will
be activated. When the doors are locked, the
turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
This setting can be adjusted in the Uconnect
system Ú page 181.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a
battery obtained from Mopar. Aftermarket
coin battery dimensions may not meet the
original OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling
may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the
mechanical latch on the back of the key
fob sideways with your thumb and then pull
the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separating key fob halves requires screw
removal (if equipped), and gently prying the
two halves of the key fob apart. Make sure
not to damage the seal during removal.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
3. Remove the battery by turning the back
cover over (battery facing downward) and
tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as
a table or similar, then replace the battery.
When replacing the battery, match the (+)
sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on the
back cover. Avoid touching the new battery
with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery,
clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together, reposition and secure the
screw.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be re-purposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer Ú page 423.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver
to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key
fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics.
In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone
attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to
start the engine but there is an issue with the
vehicle electronics, the engine will start and
shut off after two seconds.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember
to place the ignition in the OFF mode.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than ten seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics Ú page 423.
IGNITION SWITCH
IGNITION NODE MODULE (IGNM) — I F
E
QUIPPED
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has four
operating positions, three with detents and one
that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are
OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the
switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN
position.
Ignition Switch
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
(I
F EQUIPPED )
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long
as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several
operating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are
OFF, ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
Push Button Ignition
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available
ACC
Engine is not started
Some electrical devices are available
(e.g. power sunroof, power windows etc.)
ON/RUN
Driving position
All the electrical devices are available
(e.g. climate controls, heated seats, etc.)
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the
brake)
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low
battery. In this situation, a backup method can
be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the
nose side (side opposite of the emergency key)
of the key fob against the START/STOP ignition
button and push to operate the ignition switch.
Starting The Ignition With Depleted Key Fob Battery
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
NOTE:
Information on normal starting Ú page 108.
When opening the driver's door and the igni-
tion is in ON/RUN (engine not running) posi-
tion, a chime will sound to remind you to
place the ignition in the OFF position. In addi-
tion to the chime, the message “Ignition or
Accessory ON” will display in the cluster.
The power window switches and power
sunroof (if equipped) will remain active for
three minutes after the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
approximately 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in
all ambient conditions before the driver enters
the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob
may reduce this range.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK, apply the parking
brake, place the engine in the OFF position,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition is in OFF position, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the remote start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and
the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then,
the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain
in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time
shuts the engine off.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position before the Remote Start sequence
can be repeated for a third cycle.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position before the Remote Start sequence
can be repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an
intrusion
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start, or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote
Start system, push and release the START/STOP
ignition button while pressing the brake pedal
prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle. If the
vehicle is not equipped with a START/STOP
ignition button, insert the mechanical key into
the ignition switch and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off
with another push and release of the remote
start button on the key fob, or if the engine is
allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Once the driver’s door is opened, or the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN position, the climate
controls will resume the previously set
operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will show in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP igni-
tion button.
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the
system will disable for two seconds after
receiving a valid remote start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the system will automatically activate front
defrost for 15 minutes or less. The time is
dependent on the ambient temperature.
Once the timer expires, the system will
automatically adjust the settings depending
on ambient conditions. See “Remote Start
Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and
rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel and driver
heated seat feature will turn on if selected in
the comfort menu screen within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 181. In warm weather, the
driver vented seat feature will automatically
turn on when the Remote Start is activated
and is selected in the comfort menu screen.
The vehicle will adjust the climate control
settings depending on the outside ambient
temperature.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to
the optimal temperature and mode settings
dependent on the outside ambient temperature.
This will occur until the driver’s door is opened, or
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position
where the climate controls will resume their
previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If
Equipped
In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C)
to 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be
based on the last settings selected by the
driver.
In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to MAX
A/C, Bi-Level Mode, and Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 55.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration
of Remote Start until the driver’s door is opened,
or until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion. The climate control settings will change if
manually adjusted by the driver while the vehicle
is in Remote Start mode, and exit automatic over-
ride. This includes the OFF button on the climate
controls, which will turn the system off.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E–ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will be enabled.
Exiting remote start will resume previous
operation, except if the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and
operation will continue.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter-N-Go
— Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the
Vehicle Security system is armed, interior
switches for door locks and liftgate release are
disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security system will provide the following
audible and visible signals:
The horn will pulse.
The turn signals will flash.
The vehicle security light in the instrument
cluster will flash.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,
make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
system is OFF.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior
power door lock switch with the driver
and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone Ú page 26.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
the door Ú page 26.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm
the Vehicle Security system.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed
during power liftgate entry. Pushing the lift-
gate button will not disarm the Vehicle Secu-
rity system. If someone enters the vehicle
through the liftgate and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security
system will arm, regardless of whether you are
in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system
will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, five
seconds between cycles, and up to eight cycles
if the trigger remains active. The Vehicle
Security system will then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob
on each door trim panel until the red area is
hidden. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate
the door lock button until the red indicator is
visible. To unlock the rear doors, rotate the door
lock button until the red indicator is visible.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
(Continued)
If the red indicator is hidden when you shut the
door, the door is locked. Therefore, make sure
the key fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
NOTE:
The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
Lock Knob And Door Handle
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on
each front door panel. Push the switch to lock or
unlock the doors.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal and prevent the Keyless
Enter-N-Go system from starting the vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switches
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
before you drive as well as when you park
and exit the vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock
your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always make sure
the keyless ignition is cycled to OFF, and
remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries or death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Power Door Unlock Switch
2 — Power Door Lock Switch
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the
keys are found inside the car when door lock
button on the front door panel is used to lock
the door. This will occur for two attempts. Upon
the third attempt, the doors will lock even if the
key is inside.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the
ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's
door is open, the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened
from inside the vehicle without first unlocking
the door. The door may be unlocked manually
by raising the lock knob.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and
a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) and fuel door without having to
push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
within the Uconnect system Ú page 181.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle,
the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm
the security system.
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob's wireless signal and
prevent the Passive Entry handle from
locking/unlocking the vehicle.
Passive Entry activates illuminated approach
for the time set by the customer within the
Uconnect system (0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds),
and flashes the turn signal lights
Ú page 181.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock
all doors and the liftgate automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is
programmed all doors will unlock when you
grab hold of the front driver’s door handle.
You can select between “Unlock Driver Door
1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”
within the Uconnect system Ú page 181.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
All doors will unlock when the front
passenger door handle is grabbed regardless
of the driver’s door unlock preference
setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition is OFF.
There are three situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
inside the car, the car will unlock and alert the
customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors
when any of the following conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
If a paired key fob is found outside of the
vehicle, FOBIK-Safe will not activate.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then close
the doors.
If the liftgate is opened and then all 4 doors
are locked, the key fob will become locked in
the vehicle if the liftgate is closed and will not
alert the customer.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, grab the liftgate release
handle to open the liftgate.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry
button located to the left of the liftgate release
handle.
NOTE:
The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all
doors and the liftgate.
Liftgate Passive Entry / Release Handle Location
1 — Passive Entry Button
2 — Liftgate Release Handle
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handle,
push the Passive Entry lock button located on
the outside door handle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
Settings, the key protection described in
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted Ú page 423.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
feature is enabled.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The transmission gear selector was not in
PARK, then is placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — IF
E
QUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature
is enabled/disabled in the Uconnect Settings.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and
rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
When the system on a door is engaged, that
door can only be opened by using the outside
door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
When the child lock system is engaged, the
door can be opened only by using the outside
door handle even though the inside door lock
is in the unlocked position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside
to make certain it is in the locked position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside
to make certain it is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
rotate the door lock button until the lock indi-
cator is hidden (unlocked position), roll down
the window, and open the door with the
outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to
open a door with the internal handle. Once the
child protection door lock system is engaged, it
is impossible to open the doors from inside the
vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to
two different memory profiles for easy recall
through a memory switch. Each memory profile
saves desired position settings for the following
features:
Driver seat
Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (on/off)
(if equipped)
Side mirrors
A set of desired radio station presets
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors can
only be opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs,
each can be linked to either memory
position 1 or 2.
Be sure to program the radio presets prior to
programming the memory settings.
The memory setting switch is located on the
driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of
three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate
the memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two saved memory profiles.
Driver Memory Switch
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the
selected profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio
station presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory
switch, and then push the desired memory
button (1 or 2) within five seconds.
The instrument cluster display will display
which memory position is being set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to
recall a memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB
T
O MEMORY
Your remote keyless entry key fob can be
programmed to recall one of two saved memory
profiles with a push of the unlock button on the
key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must
select the “Personal Settings Linked to Key
Fob” feature through the Uconnect system
Ú page 181.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch, then within five seconds
push and release the button labeled (1) or (2)
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will
display in the instrument cluster display.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
4. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed
by pushing the unlock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will display in the instrument
cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or
two, push the desired memory button number
(1 or 2) or the unlock button on the key fob
linked to the desired memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall.
When a recall is canceled, the driver seat will
stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
(F
RONT SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of
the seat could cause you to lose control.
The seat belt might not be adjusted prop-
erly and you could be injured. Adjust the
seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the
adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats,
near the floor.
Front Seat Adjustment
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and
move the seat forward or rearward. Release the
bar once you have reached the desired position.
Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s and passenger’s seat height can be
raised or lowered by using a lever, located on
the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on
the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Seat Height Adjustment
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on
the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the
desired position and release the lever. To return
the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and
release the lever.
Recline Lever
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Rear Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment — If Equipped
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front
of the seat near the floor and release it when
the seat is at the desired position. Then, using
body pressure, move forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
Rear Seat Adjustment Bar
Rear Seat Recline Adjustment
The rear seatback also reclines for additional
passenger comfort. On vehicle’s equipped with
a sliding rear seat, pull on the pull strap while
sitting in the rear seat to recline the seatback.
Rear Sliding Seat Recliner Pull Straps
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than
the top of the seatback. This could impair
visibility or become a dangerous projectile in
a sudden stop or collision.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
On vehicle’s equipped with a fixed rear seat,
pull on the handle located on the upper
outboard side of the seatback.
Rear Fixed Seat Recline Lever
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With
Fold-Flat Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear
seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended
cargo space and still maintains some rear
seating room.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be neces-
sary to position the front seat to its mid-track
position. Also, be sure that the front seats are
fully upright and positioned forward. This will
allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
To Lower The Rear Seat
1. Lift the seatback release lever located on
the upper outer edge of the seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with a sliding rear seat,
you can also pull the pull strap located on
the middle outer edge of the seat.
Rear Sliding Seat Release Lever And Pull Strap
Rear Fixed Seat Release Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
2. Fold the rear seatback completely forward.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply placing the seats to
the open position, over time the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape.
To Raise The Rear Seat
NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have diffi-
culty returning the seat to its proper position.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with a power
driver's seat and/or power passenger seat.
The power seat switch and power seat recliner
switch are located on the outboard side of the
seat near the floor. Use the power seat switch to
adjust seat height, angle, or forward/rearward
position. Use the power seat recline switch to
adjust the angle of the seat back.
Power Seat Switch
NOTE:
Do not place objects beneath the adjustable
seat or impede proper seat adjustment.
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
rearward, the seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Height Adjustment
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
seat switch, the seat will move in the direction
of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position is reached.
Tilt Adjustment
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
up or down. Pull upward or push downward on
the front of the seat switch and the front of the
seat cushion will move in the direction of the
switch.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or
Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and
rearward by using the seat recliner switch.
The seatback will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Power Seat Recliner Switch
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or
passenger seats may be equipped with power
lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on
the outboard side of the power seat. Push the
switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch
upward or downward to raise or lower the
lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the
OFF position, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver
seat position is greater than or equal to
2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the vehicle’s ignition
in the ACC or RUN position.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not available
when the driver seat position is less than
0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. At this position, there is no benefit to
the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each
memory setting profile Ú page 29.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or
disabled through the programmable features
in the Uconnect system Ú page 181.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
On models that are equipped with Remote
Start, the heated and ventilated seats
(if equipped) can be programmed to come on
during a Remote Start.
The Auto Comfort system can be programmed
through the Uconnect system Ú page 181.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through the
climate screen and the controls screen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings.
The indicator arrows in the touchscreen buttons
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
arrows will illuminate for HI, and one for LO.
Turning the heating elements off will return the
user to the radio screen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until
the operator changes it.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two outboard rear seats
are equipped with heated seats. The heated
seat switches for these seats are located on the
rear of the center console.
There are two heated seat switches that allow
the rear passengers to operate the seats
independently. Indicator lights in each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none
for off.
Push the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS — IF
E
QUIPPED
The ventilated seats are equipped with fans
that can be controlled through the climate and
control screen in the Uconnect system. The fans
operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third
time to turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back
of your head.
REACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINTS — FRONT
S
EATS
The front driver and passenger seats are
equipped with Reactive Head Restraints (RHR).
In the event of a rear impact, the RHRs will
automatically extend forward minimizing the
gap between the back of the occupant’s head
and the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their
normal position following a rear impact. If the
RHRs do not return to their normal position, see
your authorized dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. Seatback
angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove
the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then adjust the
head restraint to the appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS
The rear outboard head restraints have two
positions: up and down. The center head
restraint has three positions: up, mid, and
down. When the center seat is being occupied
the head restraint should be adjusted to the
occupant. When there is no occupant in the
center seat, the head restraint can be lowered
for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Do not place items over the top of the Reac-
tive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These items
may interfere with the operation of the Reac-
tive Head Restraint in the event of a collision
and could result in serious injury or death.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far
as it can go. Then, push the release button
and the adjustment button at the base of
each post while pulling the head restraint up.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push down-
ward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
The seatback may need to be reclined in
order to fully remove the outboard head
restraints.
Outboard Head Restraint
Center Head Restraint
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows
you to lengthen or shorten the steering column.
The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the
steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
1 — Adjustment Button
2 — Release Button
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the re-installation instructions above prior
to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
To unlock the steering column, push the control
handle downward (toward the floor). To tilt the
steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired.
To lock the steering column in position, push
the control handle upward until fully engaged.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF
E
QUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, a sensor will monitor
the temperature of the steering wheel and
adjust the power level to maintain an optimum
heat level.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control button through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
Press the heated steering wheel button once
to turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated steering wheel can be programmed
to come on during a remote start through the
Uconnect system Ú page 181.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the heated steering wheel. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the heated
steering wheel to overheat.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR)
system.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
Voice Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate /deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Each time you give a Voice Command, first
push the VR button, wait until after the beep,
then say your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR button
and saying a Voice Command from the
current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc
Ú page 423.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
NOTE:
The vehicle is equipped with either a single ball
joint mirror or a two ball adjustable prism mirror.
The single ball joint is a twist-on mirror
that has a fixed position at the windshield.
The mirror installs on the windshield button
with a counterclockwise rotation and
requires no tools for mounting.
The two ball joint is mounted to a tombstone
button on the windshield with a set screw.
Tools are required for mounting and
dismounting.
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin
Radio, Media, And Climate Functions
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Dimming Mirror— If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the
vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed
position at the windshield. The mirror installs on
the windshield button with a counterclockwise
rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The
rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Automatic Dimming Button
NOTE:
The automatic dimming feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear
view viewing.
The automatic dimming feature can be turned
on or off through the touchscreen, or using the
power button on the base of the mirror.
Press the mirror dimmer button once to turn
the feature on.
Press the mirror dimmer button a second
time to turn the feature off.
NOTE:
In some cases, there may not be a button.
If there is no power button, the mirror will be in
default auto dimming mode.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the
center of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve
the optimal view.
NOTE:
The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and espe-
cially of the lane next to your vehicle.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much
on side convex mirrors could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object.
Use your inside mirror when judging the size
or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switches are located on the
driver's door trim panel.
Power Mirror Switches
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 55.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun
visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor
down and swing the mirror cover upward.
The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the
mirror cover will turn off the light.
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor
to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview
mirror to extend it.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever controls the operation
of the turn signals, headlight beam selection
and passing lights. The multifunction lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
1 — Left And Right Mirror Select
2 — Mirror Direction Control
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument
panel lights, and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with
a headlight switch without the OFF position.
In order to turn the exterior lights off, the head-
light switch must be rotated to AUTO position.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
first detent for parking light and instrument
panel light operation. Rotate the headlight
switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light
operation.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the head-
light switch clockwise from the parking light and
instrument panel light position to the first
detent to turn the headlight switch to the AUTO
position. Rotate to the second detent to turn on
headlight, parking light, and instrument panel
light operation.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) — IF
E
QUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when
the engine is started and remain on unless the
headlamps are turned on, the parking brake is
applied, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will also automatically deactivate when the
front fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect system Ú page 181.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
After the low beam headlights are turned on, push
the multifunction lever, located on the left side of
the steering wheel, away from you to switch the
headlights to high beam. Pulling the multifunction
lever back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automatically controlling the high
beams through the use of a camera mounted
on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The multifunction lever must be in the high
beam position in order to activate the Auto-
matic High Beams.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off using the Uconnect
system Ú page 181.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
cause the system to function improperly.
When set to AUTO, the system automatically
turns the headlights on or off based on
ambient light levels.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels.
To turn the system on, rotate the headlight
switch to the AUTO position for automatic
headlight operation. When the system is on,
the headlight time delay feature is also on.
This means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you place the ignition in the
OFF position. To turn the automatic system off,
move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
PARKING LIGHTS
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
first detent for parking light and instrument
panel light operation. Rotate the headlight
switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light
operation.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the first headlight
switch position is the parking light and instru-
ment panel light position (instead of the OFF posi-
tion). Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
second detent to turn on headlight, parking light,
and instrument panel light operation.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS WITH
W
IPERS — IF EQUIPPED
When this feature is active, the headlights will
turn on after the wipers are turned on if the
headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position
and programmable feature is set to ON.
In addition, the headlights will turn off when
the wipers are turned off if they were turned
on by this feature.
NOTE:
This feature can be turned on or off using the
Uconnect system Ú page 181.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds (programmable)
when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in
the OFF position while the headlights are still on.
Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position. The delay
interval begins when the headlight switch is
turned off.
NOTE:
The headlight delay feature is automatically
activated if the customer leaves the headlight
switch in the AUTO position while the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or
place the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will
cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition,
they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The lights must be turned off within
45 seconds of placing the ignition in the
OFF position to activate this feature.
The headlight delay time is programmable
using the Uconnect system Ú page 181.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are on after
the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the
vehicle will chime to alert the driver when the
driver's door is opened.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The front fog light switch is built into the
headlight switch.
Fog Light Switch
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push the headlight switch. To turn off the front
fog lights, either push the headlight switch a
second time or turn off the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster
illuminates when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However,
selecting the high beam headlights will turn off
the fog lights.
TURN SIGNALS
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down
to activate the turn signals. The arrows on each
side of the instrument cluster display will flash
to show proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash,
or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective LED turn signal. Please see an
authorized dealer for service.
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and a continuous
chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
When the Daytime Running Lights are on
and a turn signal is activated, the Daytime
Running Lamp will turn off on the side of the
vehicle in which the turn signal is flashing.
The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on
when the turn signal is turned off.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash three times then automatically
turn off.
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior
lights to protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
After 10 minutes, if the ignition is OFF and any
door is left open or the dimmer control is
rotated all the way up to the dome light on
position, the interior lights will automatically
turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights
will automatically turn off after eight minutes.
If the headlights are turned on and left on for
eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the
exterior lights will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
The interior lights come on when a door is
opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn
off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are
on because a door is open. The Battery
Protection also includes the glove compartment
light and the cargo light. To restore interior light
operation after automatic battery protection is
enabled (lights off), either place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position or cycle the light switch.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in
the overhead console. Each light can be turned
on by pushing a switch on either side of the
console. To turn the lights off, push the switch a
second time. These lights also turn on when a
door is opened, or when the unlock button on
the key fob is pushed, or when the dimmer
control is turned completely upward to the
second detent.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part
of the headlight switch and is located on the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the instrument panel dimmer control upward will
increase the brightness of the instrument panel
lights and lighted cupholders (if equipped).
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Instrument Panel Dimmer (Vehicles Sold In
Canada Only)
Dome Light Position
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control
completely upward to the second detent to turn
on the interior lights. The interior lights will
remain on when the instrument panel dimmer
control is in this position.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward
or downward to increase or decrease the
brightness of the ambient light located in the
overhead console, door handle lights, under
instrument panel lights, door map pocket lights,
and cubby bin lights.
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
(Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
Interior Light Defeat (Off)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to
the extreme bottom (O) off position. The interior
lights will remain off when the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness
Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control
upward to the first detent. This feature brightens
all text displays such as the odometer,
instrument cluster display, and radio when the
position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are
located on the windshield wiper/washer lever
on the right side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a
switch, located on the end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first
four detent positions for intermittent settings,
the fifth detent for low wiper operation and the
sixth detent for high wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper Operation
NOTE:
Do not operate the windshield wipers with the
blades lifted from the windshield.
Intermittent Wipers
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings
when weather conditions make a single wiping
cycle, with a variable delay between cycles,
desirable. At driving speeds above 10 mph
(16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from
a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every
one second (fourth detent). If the vehicle is
moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay
times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward
toward you and hold. If the lever is pulled while
in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn
on and operate for several wipe cycles after
the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the
off position, the wipers will operate for several
wipe cycles, then turn off.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the
windshield wiper switch is turned off, and the
blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see
other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid
sudden icing of the windshield during freezing
weather, warm the windshield with the
defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and
release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
Mist Control
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the
wipers. Rotate the end of the multifunction
lever to one of four detent positions to activate
this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay detent
one is the least sensitive, and wiper delay
position four is the most sensitive.
Setting three is preferred by the average driver
during normal rain conditions.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or sili-
cone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned
on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 181.
The Rain Sensing system has protection
features for the wiper blades and arms, and will
not operate under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni-
tion is first placed in the ON position, the
Rain Sensing system will not operate until the
wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the outside
temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission
is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch is
moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h) or the gear selector is moved out of
the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Starting system,
Rain Sensing wipers are not operational
when the vehicle is in the remote start mode.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of
the steering column. The rear wiper/washer is
operated by rotating a switch, located at the
middle of the lever.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the center portion of the
lever upward to the first detent for
intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear wiper
operation.
To use the washer, push the lever
forward and hold while spray is
desired. If the lever is pushed while in
the intermittent setting, the wiper will
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after
the end of the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously
selected.
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off
position, the wiper will operate for several wipe
cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.
Once the lever is released the pump will resume
normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the wiper will
automatically return to the “park” position.
WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER — IF
E
QUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield
Wiper De-Icer feature that may be activated
under the following conditions:
Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automati-
cally in the case of a cold weather manual
start with full front defrost, and when the
ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automati-
cally when the rear defrost is turned on and
when the ambient temperature is below
33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation —
When remote start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F
(0.6°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will
activate. Exiting remote start will resume its
previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation
will continue.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction
of air circulating throughout the vehicle.
The controls are located on the touchscreen
(if equipped) and on the instrument panel below
the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display With Automatic
Temperature Controls
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display With Automatic
Temperature Controls
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display With
Automatic Temperature Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the
current setting to the coldest output
of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation
to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate to change the current
setting. The A/C indicator illuminates
when A/C is on.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the system
between Recirculation mode and
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions, such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually
without disturbing the mode control selection.
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging
may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
recommended.
Auto Button
Set your desired temperature and
press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and
maintain your desired temperature by
automatically adjusting the blower
speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly
recommended for efficiency.
You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen.
Push the button on the faceplate.
Toggling this function will cause the system to
switch between manual mode and automatic
mode Ú page 63.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push
and release the button on the
faceplate, to change the current
airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front
Defrost indicator illuminates when Front
Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield
and side window demist outlets. When the
defrost button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting and defogging. When
toggling the front defrost mode button, the
climate system will return to the previous
setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push
and release the button on the
faceplate, to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is
on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and
Down Buttons
These buttons provide the driver
and passenger with independent
temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red
arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will
only appear if the system is equipped with an
automatic climate control system.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator
illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC
synchronizes the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger’s temperature setting
while in SYNC will automatically exit this
feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of
air forced through the climate control
system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower
will cause automatic mode to switch to manual
operation. The speeds can be selected using
either the blower control knob on the faceplate or
the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the
blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases
as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the
Mode buttons on the touchscreen to
change the airflow distribution mode.
The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets, and
demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Selecting this mode from the
touchscreen causes air to flow from
the outlets in the instrument panel.
Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of air.
The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard
outlets can be moved up and down or side to
side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut
off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off
or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Bi-Level Mode
Selecting this mode from the
touchscreen causes air to flow from
the instrument panel outlets and floor
outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Selecting this mode from the
touchscreen causes air to flow from
the floor outlets. A slight amount of air
is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Selecting this mode from the
touchscreen causes air to flow
through the floor, defrost, and side
window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting
is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on
the touchscreen, or push the OFF
button on the faceplate to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
MAX A/C Setting
Set the temperature control knob to
the MAX A/C setting to change the
current setting to the coldest output
of air. Moving the temperature control
knob away from the MAX A/C setting causes the
MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase
blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radi-
ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Push the Recirculation button to
change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air
mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions, such as
smoke, odors, dust, or humidity are present.
Recirculation can be used in all modes except
for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if
equipped, the Recirculation mode is not
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled
automatically if this mode is selected.
Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode causes the LED in the control button to
blink and then turns off.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the Mode Control knob to the
Front Defrost mode setting. Air comes
from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost
button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost
Control button to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped).
The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the
rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after
10 minutes.
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature
of the air forced through the climate system.
The temperature increases as you
turn the temperature control knob
clockwise.
The temperature decreases as you
turn the temperature control knob
counterclockwise.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount
of air forced through the climate
control system. There are seven
blower speeds available. The blower
speed increases as you turn the blower control
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the
blower control knob counterclockwise.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob to adjust
airflow distribution. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF
To turn the Climate Controls off, turn
the blower control knob to the OFF (O)
position.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROLS WITH
A T
OUCHSCREEN
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display With Manual
Temperature Controls
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display With Manual
Temperature Controls
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display With
Manual Temperature Controls
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the
current setting to the coldest output
of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation
to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate to change the current
setting. The A/C indicator illuminates
when A/C is on.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase
blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radi-
ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate, to change the system
between Recirculation mode and
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions, such
as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes
except Defrost. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed
out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if
equipped, the Recirculation mode is not
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled
automatically if this mode is selected.
Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode causes the LED in the control button to
blink and then turns off.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push
and release the button on the
faceplate, to change the current
airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front
Defrost indicator illuminates when Front
Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield
and side window demist outlets. When the
defrost button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting and defogging. When
toggling the front defrost mode button, the
climate system will return to the previous
setting.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push
and release the button on the
faceplate, to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after 10 minutes.
Driver and Passenger Temperature Control
Buttons
These buttons provide the driver
and passenger with independent
temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red
arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will
only appear if the system is equipped with an
automatic climate control system.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator
illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC
synchronizes the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger’s temperature setting
while in SYNC will automatically exit this
feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of
air forced through the climate control
system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower
will cause automatic mode to switch to manual
operation. The speeds can be selected using
either the blower control knob on the faceplate or
the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the
blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases
as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the
Mode buttons on the touchscreen to
change the airflow distribution mode.
The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets, and
demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Selecting this mode from the
touchscreen causes air to flow from
the outlets in the instrument panel.
Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of air.
The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard
outlets can be moved up and down or side to
side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut
off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off
or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Selecting this mode from the
touchscreen causes air to flow from
the instrument panel outlets and floor
outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Selecting this mode from the
touchscreen causes air to flow from
the floor outlets. A slight amount of air
is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Selecting this mode from the
touchscreen causes air to flow
through the floor, defrost, and side
window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting
is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on
the touchscreen, or push the OFF
button on the faceplate to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC) — I
F EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would
like the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S.
or Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer-programmable feature
Ú page 181.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands:
“Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set the passenger temperature to
70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature
of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on
high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication
to minimize the possibility of compressor damage
when the system is started again.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system
may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin
comfort. Customer settings will be maintained upon
return to an engine running condition.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating
element located at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following
conditions are met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
during a cold weather manual start with full
defrost, and when the ambient temperature
is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
when the Rear Defrost is operating and the
ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the
outside ambient temperature is less than
33°F (0.6°C) the windshield wiper de-icer
will activate. Exiting remote start will resume
its previous operation. If the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer and oper-
ation will continue.
Operating Tips Chart
NOTE:
The below chart is for Manual Override Opera-
tion, otherwise run in AUTO.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather
And Vehicle
Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode), (MAX A/C)
on, and blower on high. Roll
down the windows for a
minute to flush out the hot
air. Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C)
on and set the mode
control to the (Panel
Mode) position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in
(Bi-Level) position.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Mix Mode) and turn on
(A/C) to keep windows
clear.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The power window switches on the driver's door
control all the door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be
operated by using the single window switches
on the passenger door trim panel. The window
switches will operate only when the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position.
To open the window part way (manually), push
the window switch down briefly and release.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is program-
mable in the Uconnect system Ú page 181.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the
front and rear passenger doors window
switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down for half a second
and release. The window will go down
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up, for a short period of
time, and release and the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then
go back down. Remove the obstacle and use
the window switch again to close the window.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to the
(Floor Mode) position.
If windshield fogging starts
to occur, move the control
to the (Mix Mode)
position.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power
windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the windows while operating the
power window switches. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the
switch lightly and hold to close the window
manually.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the switch up for an additional two seconds
after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
window completely and continue to hold the
switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on
the rear passenger doors. To disable the window
controls, push and release the window lockout
button (the indicator light on the button will turn on).
To enable the window controls, push and release
the window lockout button again (the indicator light
on the button will turn off).
Power Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
open the front and rear windows together to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located to the
left between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
Power Sunroof Switches
The power shade switches are located to the
right between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
Power Shade Switches
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
The sunroof has two programmed open
positions, comfort stop position and full open
position. The comfort stop position is set to
minimize wind buffeting when driving with side
windows closed and sunroof open. If the
sunshade is in the closed position when
initiating a sunroof open or vent command the
sunshade will automatically open to the half
open position prior to the sunroof opening.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward to open and release it
within one-half second, the sunroof will open to
the comfort stop position and automatically
stop. Push the switch rearward and release it
again, the sunroof will open to the full open
position and automatically stop. This is called
Express Open.
Push the switch forward to close and release it
within one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close.
During Express Open or Express Close
operation, any movement of the sunshade
switch will stop the shade.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the switch rearward to open.
The sunroof will open to the comfort stop
position and automatically stop. Push the
switch rearward and hold it again, the sunroof
will open to the full open position and
automatically stop.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch
in the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement.
The sunroof will remain in a partially opened
position until the switch is operated and held
again.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE POWER
S
HADE
The sunshade has two programmed open
positions: half open and full open. When
opening the sunshade from the closed position
the sunshade will always stop at the half open
position regardless of express or manual open
operation. The switch must be actuated again
to continue on to full open position.
If the sunroof is open or vented the sunshade
cannot be closed beyond the half open position.
Pushing the sunshade close switch when the
sunroof is open/vented and the sunshade is at
half open position will first automatically close
sunroof prior to the sunshade closing.
Express Open/Close
Push the sunshade switch rearward to open
and release it within one-half second, the
sunshade will open to the half open position
and stop automatically. Push and release the
switch again from the half open position and the
sunshade will open to the full open position and
stop automatically. This is called Express Open.
Push the sunshade switch forward to close and
release it within one-half second. If the sunroof is
in closed position the sunshade will full close
automatically from any position. If the sunroof is
open or vented the sunshade will close to the half
open position and stop; push and release the
sunshade switch forward again to automatically
close both the sunroof and sunshade completely.
This is called Express Close.
During Express Open or Express Close
operation, any movement of the sunshade
switch will stop the shade.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward to
open. The shade will open to the half open
position and stop automatically. Push and hold
the sunshade switch rearward again and the
shade will open automatically to the full open
position.
Push and hold the sunshade switch forward to
close. If the sunroof is in closed position the
sunshade will full close from any position. If the
sunroof is open or vented the sunshade will
close to the half open position and stop;
pushing and holding the sunshade switch
forward again will close both the sunroof and
sunshade completely.
Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunshade will remain in a
partially opened position until the switch is
pushed again.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing
of the sunroof during the Express Close operation.
If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is
detected, the sunroof will automatically retract.
Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
VENTING SUNROOF
Push and release the "Vent" button within
one-half second and the sunroof will open to the
vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, and
it will occur regardless of sunroof position.
During Express Vent operation, any movement
of the switch will stop the sunroof.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
The power sunroof switch will remain active for
up to approximately 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 181.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel. Periodically check
for and clear out any debris that may have
collected in the tracks.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under
the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and pull
the safety latch release lever forward
(toward you). The safety latch release lever
is located behind the front edge of the hood,
slightly off-center to the right.
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
CLOSING THE HOOD
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from
the point where the props no longer hold the
hood open.
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing
the liftgate button on the key fob or by pushing
the electronic liftgate release handle
Ú page 26.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to open the power liftgate.
Once the liftgate is open, pushing the button
twice within five seconds a second time will
close the liftgate.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed
by pushing the liftgate button located on the
instrument panel to right of the headlight
switch. If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate
can be closed by pushing the liftgate button
located on the left rear trim panel, near the
liftgate opening. If the liftgate is in motion,
pushing the liftgate button located on the left
rear trim panel will reverse the liftgate.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry
button located to the left of liftgate release
handle to lock the liftgate and doors.
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
Uconnect, all doors will unlock when you push
the liftgate release handle. If "Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press" is programmed within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 181, the liftgate will unlock
when you push the liftgate release handle.
Liftgate Entry
NOTE:
Use the power door lock switch on either
front door trim panel or the key fob to lock
and unlock the liftgate.
The manual door locks on the doors and the
driver's door lock cylinder will not lock and
unlock the liftgate.
Power Liftgate Malfunction Procedure:
1. In the event of a power malfunction to the
liftgate, the liftgate can be released by
accessing the service release feature in
the latch. This can be done using a 3 mm
diameter screwdriver.
2. From inside the gate, an eyelet can be seen.
Place the screwdriver in the eyelet.
3. Rotate the screwdriver handle to actuate
the lever and release the latch.
4. If liftgate is left open for an extended period
of time, the liftgate may need to be closed
manually to reset power liftgate functionality.
NOTE:
The liftgate can also be opened manually by
pushing the electronic liftgate release handle
and pulling upward in one fluid motion.
1 — Passive Entry Button
2 — Liftgate Release Handle
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured by
these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when
you are operating the vehicle.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
There are several different ways to close the
liftgate:
Manually by grabbing the liftgate closing
handle and pulling in a downward motion to
close the liftgate. Release the handle when
the liftgate takes over the closing effort.
Key Fob
Hands-Free (if equipped)
Liftgate Instrument Panel Button
Power Liftgate Button On The Pillar In The
Cargo Area
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry lock/push button
located to the left of the back-up camera will
lock the vehicle only.
The power liftgate may be closed by pushing the
rear power liftgate button, located in the upper
left trim in the liftgate opening. Pushing the
button will only close the liftgate. This button
cannot be used to open the liftgate.
Rear Power Liftgate Button
HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
To open or close the liftgate using hands-free
activation, use a straight in and out kicking
motion under the vehicle activation zone in the
general location below the rear license plate.
Do not move your foot sideways or in a
sweeping motion or the sensors may not
detect the motion.
NOTE:
Activation zone is the same for vehicles
equipped with and without trailer tow package.
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the
liftgate will chime, the hazard lights will flash
and the liftgate will open after approximately
one second, or close after approximately
three seconds. These settings can be enabled
or disabled through the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 181.
NOTE:
Opening or closing the Hands-Free Liftgate
requires a valid Passive Entry key fob within
5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle. If a valid
Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft (1.5 m),
the liftgate will not respond to any kicks.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be
turned on or off through the Uconnect system
Ú page 181.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature should be
turned off during jacking, tire changing,
manual car wash, and vehicle service.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature can be activated
by any metallic object making a similar in-and-out
motion under the rear fascia/bumper, such as
cleaning using a metal broom.
The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate
when the transmission is in PARK.
If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate
while it is opening or closing, the liftgate will
automatically reverse to the closed/open posi-
tion, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
There are pinch sensors attached to the
side of the liftgate opening. Light pressure
anywhere along these strips will cause the
liftgate to return to the open position.
If the power liftgate encounters multiple
obstructions within the same cycle, the
system will automatically stop. If this occurs,
the liftgate must be operated manually.
The power liftgate will release, but not power
open, in temperatures below −12°F (−24°C).
Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before opening the liftgate.
If the liftgate is left open for an extended
period of time, the liftgate may need to be
closed manually to reset power liftgate func-
tionality.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open
position. However, because the gas pressure
drops with temperature, it may be necessary to
assist the props when opening the liftgate in
cold weather.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate.
Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may
activate the liftgate obstacle detection feature
and stop the power operation or reverse its
direction.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity
of 400 lbs (181 kg).
To provide additional storage area, each rear
seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended
cargo space and still maintains some rear
seating room Ú page 31.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are
closed, and the climate control blower
switch is set at high speed. Do not use the
recirculation mode.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate
travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is
closed and latched before driving away.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
(Continued)
Cargo Extension Panels (Only With Sliding
Rear Seat) — If Equipped
Cargo extension panels can be folded and
unfolded. When the rear seats are moved to the
more forward positions and the rear seat backs
are folded down, the extension panels (2) can
be unfolded manually by hand. The extension
panels can be used to extend the load floor to
the rear seats and/or hide the gap between the
load floor and rear seats or to assist in loading
large items into the cargo area.
NOTE:
If equipped with a cargo area floor mat, the mat
must be removed before unfolding the exten-
sion panels.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor
should be used to secure loads safely when the
vehicle is moving.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim
panels.
Rear Storage Bins
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of
the vehicle on the sides of the load floor.
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or
accident, a tie-down could pull loose and
allow the child seat to come loose. A child
could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the
rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is
intended for load carrying purposes only,
not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and
passengers can change the vehicle center of
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of
control resulting in personal injury, follow
these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Do not carry loads that exceed the load
limits described on the label attached to
the left door or left door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo
floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far
forward as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of
the rear axle. Too much weight or improp-
erly placed weight over or behind the rear
axle can cause the vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair visi-
bility or become a dangerous projectile in a
sudden stop or accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons On Sun Visor
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home
security systems. The HomeLink® unit is
powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in
the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release
any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons.
These buttons will activate the devices they
are programmed to with each press of the
corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located
above the center button.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on the driver’s
side sun visor, designate the three different
HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink®
indicator is located above the center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity system is active.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are
trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the
channels of your HomeLink® before you use it
for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first
time. Do not erase channels when programming
additional buttons.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine
whether the device has a rolling code or
non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code,
a good indicator is its manufacturing date.
Typically, devices manufactured after 1995
have rolling codes. A device with a rolling code
will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately
visible when looking at the device. The name
and color of the button may vary slightly by
manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will
not have a rolling code. These devices will also
not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, follow
the steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels
when programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program,
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the garage door opener transmitter button
you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Once this happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling
code/non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener
motor. Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or
“TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three
times (holding the button for two seconds
each time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the final
steps for the rolling code procedure.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final
Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the steps
from the beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink®
to a miscellaneous device follows the same
procedure as programming to a garage door
opener Ú page 181. Be sure to determine if the
device has a rolling code, or non-rolling code
before beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner. The procedure may
need to be performed multiple times to success-
fully pair the device to your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that
has been previously trained, without erasing all
the channels, follow the procedure below. Be
sure to determine whether the new device you
want to program the HomeLink® button to has
a Rolling Code, or Non-rolling Code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the HomeLink® Indicator light
begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To
A Garage Door Opener” and follow all
remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage
or confined area while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous when inhaled and can cause you
and others to be severely injured or killed.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every
two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal.
The indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds
or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
Step 2 and follow all remaining steps
Ú page 423.
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Glove Compartment
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
There is also an additional storage bin located
above the instrument panel in the center of the
dash.
Console Storage Compartment
The center console has both an upper and lower
storage area which can hold cell phones, PDAs,
and other small items.
Center Console
To access the upper storage compartment,
lift the top latch. To access the lower storage
compartment, lift the bottom latch.
Instrument Panel Cubby
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
instrument panel cubby. The cubby is located
on the top of the instrument panel, above the
radio.
To open the instrument panel cubby, pull the
latch toward you and the cubby door will pop
open.
Instrument Panel Cubby Latch
Instrument Panel Cubby Opened
To close the instrument panel cubby, push
down on the door until it latches.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving
with the glove compartment open may result
in injury in a collision.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
SUN VISORS
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun
visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor
down and swing the mirror cover upward.
The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the
mirror cover will turn off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
AUX/USB C ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Instrument Panel Media Hub
Located in the front storage area, this feature
allows an external USB device or AUX electronic
device to be plugged into the port or jack.
If equipped, there may also be a USB Port in the
center console located to the left of the power
outlet.
The third and fourth USB Ports are located
behind the center console, above the power
inverter. Both are charge only USB ports.
Charge Only USB Ports
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB Port
may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped Ú page 226.
If Equipped with a Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV with
8.4-inch Display, refer to “Android Auto™” or
“Apple CarPlay®” in the Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Port
1 — Charge Only Type C USB And Type A USB Port
2 — Charge Only Type C USB And Type A USB Port
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics, and other low
powered electrical accessories. The power
outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is
powered. Power outlets labeled with a “key” are
powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a
“battery” are connected directly to the battery
and powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the “battery”
powered outlets should be removed or turned
off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
The front power outlet is located inside the
storage area in front of the shifter.
Front Power Outlet
A second fused 12 Volt power outlet is located
on the left quarter trim panel in the cargo area.
This power outlet has power available when the
ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.
Rear Power Outlet
NOTE:
The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to
“battery” powered anytime by switching the rear
power outlet fuse in the Power Distribution
Center panel from fuse location F91 to F81.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F81 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet
(battery powered at all times)
2 — F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet
(powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
(Continued)
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
Rear Center Console Power Inverter
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet
located on the back of the center console to
convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can
power cellular phones, electronics and other
low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end game consoles
exceed this power limit, as will most power
tools.
To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug
in the device. The outlet automatically turns off
when the device is unplugged.
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
automatically shuts down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
2
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The load carried on the roof, when equipped
with a luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg), and it should be uniformly distributed
over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever
cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the
straps frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at your authorized
dealer through Mopar parts.
External racks do not increase the total load
carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the
total occupant and luggage load inside the
vehicle, plus the load on the luggage rack, do
not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before
driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads
can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high
speeds, resulting in personal injury or property
damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when
carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof
rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy
loads as evenly as possible and secure the
load appropriately.
Long loads, which extend over the wind-
shield, should be secured to both the front
and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection between
the surface of the roof and the load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural
causes or nearby truck traffic, can add
sudden upward lift to a load. It is recom-
mended to not carry large flat loads, such as
wood panels or surfboards, which may result
in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
Loads should always be secured to cross-
bars first, with tie down loops used as addi-
tional securing points if needed. Tie loops
are intended as supplementary tie down
points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha-
nisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
85
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster
3
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Premium Instrument Cluster
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display Ú page 88.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in
the fuel tank when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN mode.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located
Ú page 161.
5. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
The gauge will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather
or up mountain grades. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range. NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off
until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn
the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
3
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
instrument cluster display, which offers useful
information to the driver. With the ignition in
the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display
the total miles or kilometers in the odometer.
The steering wheel mounted controls allow you
to scroll through and enter the main menus and
submenus.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
The instrument cluster display menu items
consist of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip Info
Stop/Start
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
Speed Warning
The system allows the driver to select
information by pushing the following buttons
mounted on the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the up or down arrow button allows
you to cycle through the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
area.
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — OK Button
5 — Down Arrow Button
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the left or right arrow button allows
you to cycle through the submenu items of the
Main menu item.
NOTE:
Holding the up /down or left /right
arrow button will loop the user through the
currently selected menu or options
presented on the screen.
Upon returning to a main menu, the last
submenu screen viewed within that main
menu will be displayed.
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item. To reset displayed/selected
features push and hold the OK button for two
seconds.
OIL LIFE RESET — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the
instrument cluster display for five seconds after
a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, push and release the OK button.
To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer
to the following procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN mode (do not start
the engine).
2. Navigate to “Oil Life” submenu in “Vehicle
Info” in the instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge
resets to 100%.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset
Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
3
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items
display in the center of the instrument cluster.
Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle
features.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the speedometer menu icon is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to toggle units,
mph or km/h (If Equipped), of the speedometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Vehicle Info menu icon is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the left or right arrow
button to scroll through the information
submenus and push and release the OK button
to select or reset the submenus.
Tire Pressure: This menu option will display
the current tire pressure. A low tire will be
highlighted in red for the 7 inch cluster and it
will be highlighted in white text for the
3.5 inch cluster.
Coolant Temperature: This menu option will
display the current coolant temperature of
the vehicle.
Transmission Temperature: This menu will
display the current transmission temperature
of the vehicle.
Oil Life: This menu option will display the
current oil life of the vehicle.
Oil Temperature: This menu option will
display the current oil temperature level of
the vehicle.
Battery Voltage: This menu option will display
the current voltage level of the battery.
Driver Assist
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Driver Assist menu title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If
Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the
current ACC and LaneSense system settings.
The information displayed depends on the
status of ACC and LaneSense.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button (located on the steering wheel) until one
of the following displays in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, and LaneSense is
OFF, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button
(located on the steering wheel) and the
following will display in the instrument cluster
display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in
the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity Ú page 130.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays
the current LaneSense system settings.
The information displayed depends on
LaneSense system status and the conditions
that need to be met Ú page 155.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy menu title is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Toggle the left or right arrow button to
select the screen with or without current fuel
economy display. Push and hold the OK button
to reset average fuel economy feature.
Range – The display shows the estimated
distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. When the
Range value is less than 10 miles (16 km) esti-
mated driving distance, the Range display will
change to a “LOW FUEL” message. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will
turn off the “LOW FUEL” message and a new
Range value will display. Range cannot be
reset through the OK button.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable
distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range
displayed value.
Average – The display shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since
the last reset.
Current – This display shows the current fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) form
while driving.
3
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip menu title is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Toggle the left
or right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B.
The Trip information will display the following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or
km) traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last
reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average
fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of
Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time
of travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Stop/Start menu title is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio menu title is displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Messages Menu Icon is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages. Pushing the left or
right arrow button will allow you to scroll
through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to enter the
submenus and follow the prompts on the screen
as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows you
to change what information is displayed in the
instrument cluster as well as the location where
that information is displayed.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left or Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp.
Time
Range to Empty
Average MPG (or L / 100 km or km / L)
Current MPG (or L / 100 km or km / L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Favorite Menus
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist (show/hide)
Fuel Economy (show/hide)
Trip Info (show/hide)
Stop/Start
Audio (show/hide)
(Stored) Messages
Screen Setup
Speed Warning — If Equipped
3
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Center
None
Compass
Outside Temp.
Time
Range to Empty
Average MPG (or L / 100 km or km / L)
Current MPG (or L / 100 km or km / L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Audio
Speedometer
Menu Title
Gear Display — If Equipped With A Premium Cluster
Full
Single
Odometer — If Equipped With A Premium Cluster
On
Off
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
Speed Warning
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Speed Warning Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to enter speed
warning. Use the up or down arrow button
to select a desired speed, then push and release
the OK button to set the speed. When the set
speed is just exceeded, a single chime will sound
along with a pop-up message of speed warning
exceeded. When the set speedis exceeded by
2 mph (3 km/h) or more, the indicator will light
up yellow and flash along with a continuous
chime (until the speed is no longer exceeded).
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
S
ELECTABLE ITEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to
view the following main menu items:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary Ú page 88.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
monitoring of the electrical system and status
of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions
will take place to extend the driving time and
distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system Ú page 98.
The electrical loads that may be switched off
(if equipped), and vehicle functions which can
be effected by load reduction:
Heated Seats / Vented Seats / Heated Wheel
Heated / Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
150W Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Speedometer Stop/Start
Vehicle Info Audio
Driver Assist Messages
Fuel Economy Screen Setup
Trip
3
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because
the electrical loads are larger than the capa-
bility of charging system. The charging system
is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior
and interior lights, overloaded power outlets
+12 Volts, 150W, USB ports) during certain
driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volts portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaner’s, game consoles
and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior).
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports.
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature).
Check the audio settings (volume).
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecu-
tive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle
and driving pattern did not help to identify the
cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a
failure indication. All active telltales will display
first if applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment options
and current vehicle status. Some telltales are
optional and may not appear.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when
the driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound
Ú
page 284.
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application.
If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light
will remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
3
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light will also turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly.
If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction
with the charging system. Contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning
Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the Electric Power
Steering (EPS) system Ú page 125.
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle
the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK (P) position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service
as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/
rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing. The light will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the
light does not come on during starting, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine
coolant temperature is too high, this
indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning
(A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle.
If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call
for service Ú page 354.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the hood is left open and not fully
closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure.
A chime will sound when this light
turns on and a message “Oil Pressure
Low” will display in the message screen. If the
light turns on while driving, pull the vehicle to
the side of the road at a safe location, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible,
check the oil level and correct the oil level if it is
low. Contact an authorized dealer.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light may or may not indicate
how much oil is in the engine. If the oil level is
low and corrected, the engine can be restarted.
Otherwise the vehicle should be serviced by an
authorized dealer Ú page 363.
NOTE:
The light may flash, a message in the center of the
dash may display momentarily “low oil pressure”
and a chime may occur during sharp cornering
maneuvers. If this happen it may indicate a low oil
level. The oil level should be checked and dealer
service performed if this occurs.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
CAUTION!
If the vehicle is driven with low oil levels
severe engine damage can occur. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
3
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you
may continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
Vehicle Security System is arming,
and then will flash slowly until the
vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the ACC system.
Contact a local authorized dealer for
service Ú page 130.
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the (ABS).
The light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required
as soon as possible. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is also not on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, have the brake system inspected by an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the Electronic Stability Control system
is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 2 gal (7.5 L) this light
will turn on, and remain on until fuel is
added. A single warning chime will
sound with Low Fuel Warning.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low
Ú page 367.
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the LaneSense system is not
operating and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be
solid yellow when the vehicle is
approaching a lane marker. The warning
light will flash when the vehicle is
crossing the lane marker
Ú
page 155.
3
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light
The Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems.
This warning light will illuminate when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine
start. If the bulb does not come on when turning
the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have
the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible if this occurs.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
signal a fault with the 4WD system.
If the light stays on or comes on
during driving, it means that the 4WD
system is not functioning properly and that
service is required. We recommend you drive to
the nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate a
fault in the Forward Collision Warning
System. Contact an local authorized
dealer for service Ú page 277.
Service Stop / Start System Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
Stop/Start system is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact
an authorized dealer for service.
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Cruise Control System is
not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure warning light when one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised.
Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
3
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Active Speed Limiter Fault Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate to signal
when there is a fault detected with the
Active Speed Limiter.
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates that Forward
Collision Warning is off Ú page 277.
4WD LOW Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the 4WD LOW mode.
The front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque
at the wheels Ú page 120.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle
lock has been activated.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Active Speed Limiter SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the Active
Speed Limiter is on and set to a
specific speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set
and a target vehicle is detected
Ú page 130.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without
Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display the distance setting
for the ACC system when the system
is engaged Ú page 130.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is set to the
desired speed Ú page 128.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on
Ú page 45.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is
not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to have your sensor function checked.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid green when both
lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” and ready
to provide visual and torque warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs
Ú page 155.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on Ú page 45.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop”
mode.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator
will flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Active Speed Limiter Ready Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Active
Speed Limiter is on, but not set.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned
on, but is not set Ú page 130.
Adaptive Cruise Control Set Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) has reached the speed
desired and the set button has been
selected Ú page 130.
Hill Descent Control Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill
Descent Control (HDC) feature is
turned on. The lamp will be on solid
when HDC is armed. HDC can only be
armed when the transfer case is in the 4WD
LOW position and the vehicle speed is less then
30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not
met while attempting to use the HDC feature,
the HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON,
but not armed, the LaneSense
indicator light illuminates solid white.
This occurs when only left, right, or
neither lane line has been detected. If a single
lane line is detected, the system is ready to
provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line
Ú page 155.
3
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when
“Selec-Speed Control” is activated.
To activate “Selec-Speed Control”, ensure the
vehicle is in Four - Wheel Drive (4WD) Low and
push the button on the Instrument Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter
Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in
the instrument cluster display.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the Cruise
Control has been turned on, but not
set Ú page 128.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II.
This system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be
drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may
need to access this information to assist with
the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 180.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light
is functioning and is not on when the
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
The OBD ll system may not be ready if your
vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a
depleted battery or a battery replacement. If the
OBD ll system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction
Indicator Light symbol come on as part of a
normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
3
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the
NEUTRAL (N) or PARK (P) position. Apply the
brake before shifting to any driving range.
NORMAL STARTING — GASOLINE
E
NGINE
Press the brake pedal and place the ignition in the
START mode and release when the engine starts.
If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds:
1. Place the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds.
3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the
vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle
could be reduced if both pedals are pressed at
the same time. If pressure is detected on both
pedals simultaneously, a warning message will
display in the instrument cluster Ú page 88.
Tip Start Feature
Place the ignition in the START mode and
release it as the starter engages. The starter
motor will automatically disengage itself once
the engine is running. If the engine fails to start,
the starter will disengage automatically in
10 seconds. If this occurs:
1. Place the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds.
3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle. If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
always make sure the keyless ignition node
is in OFF mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
(Continued)
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
(B
ELOW –20°F OR −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from an
authorized dealer) is recommended.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the
vehicle has not been started or driven for at
least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables
to the battery to ensure a full battery
charge during the crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the START mode and
release it when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds,
place the ignition in the OFF mode, wait
10 to 15 seconds to allow the starter to
cool, then repeat the Extended Park
Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight
attempts, allow the starter to cool for
at least 10 minutes, then repeat the
procedure.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
A
FTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and
it will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and
permits quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension
cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C),
the engine block heater is recommended for at
least an hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the engine. For ambient temperatures
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is
required for at least four hours to have an
adequate warming effect on the engine.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 351.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
The engine block heater cord is routed under
the hood, behind to the driver’s side headlamp.
Follow the steps below to properly use the
engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord
(behind the driver’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures
the heater cord in place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and
plug it into a grounded, three-wire extension
cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord
to the hook-and-loop strap and properly stow
away behind the driver’s side headlamp.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory
installed option. If your vehicle is not
equipped, heater cords are available
from an authorized Mopar dealer.
The engine block heater will require
110 Volts AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the
heater element.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to
a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration
in low gear can be detrimental and should be
avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades see
Ú
page 417.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers
simple operation, and some additional features
that make the parking brake more convenient
and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to
prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is applied. Also, be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK (P).
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
(Continued)
You can engage the park brake in two ways:
Manually, by applying the EPB switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park
Brake feature in the customer programmable
features Ú page 188.
The EPB switch is located in the center console,
behind the gear selector.
EPB Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on
the EPB switch momentarily. You may hear a
sound from the back of the vehicle while the
parking brake engages. Once the parking brake
is fully engaged, the red BRAKE telltale light in
the instrument cluster and an indicator on the
switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
pedal while you apply the parking brake, you
may notice a small amount of brake pedal
movement. The parking brake can be applied
even when the ignition switch is OFF but
the BRAKE telltale light will not illuminate.
The parking brake can only be released when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN mode.
NOTE:
The EPB fault light will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 90 seconds in
either the released or applied position. The light
will extinguish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled,
the parking brake will automatically engage
whenever the transmission is placed into PARK,
while the ignition is turned OFF. If your foot is on
the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount
of brake pedal movement while the parking
brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically
when the ignition is ON, the transmission is in
DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R) and the driver seat
belt is buckled.
To release the parking brake manually, the
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN mode. Put
your foot on the brake pedal, then push the EPB
switch down momentarily. You may hear a sound
from the back of the vehicle while the parking
brake disengages. You may also notice a small
amount of movement in the brake pedal. Once
the parking brake is fully disengaged, The BRAKE
telltale light in the instrument cluster and the LED
indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. Apply the park brake before placing the
gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to engage the parking brake while
the vehicle is in motion, maintain upward
pressure on the EPB switch for as long as
engagement is desired. The BRAKE telltale light
will illuminate, and a continuous chime will
sound. The rear stop lamps will also be
illuminated automatically while the vehicle
remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the
vehicle is in motion, release the EPB switch. If
the vehicle is brought to a complete stop using
the parking brake, when the vehicle reaches
approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) the parking
brake will remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB fault light will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the BRAKE telltale
light flashing. In this event, urgent service of the
EPB system is required. Do not rely on the
parking brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a
standstill and the automatic transmission is
placed in PARK, whenever the ignition is turned
OFF. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled
by customer selection through the customer
programmable features Ú page 188.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking
brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious
damage to the brake system. Be sure the
parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
Any single auto park brake application can be
bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the
release position while the transmission is
placed in PARK.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB System
that will engage the parking brake automatically
if the vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition
is in ON/RUN mode.
For automatic transmissions, the parking brake
will automatically engage if all of the following
conditions are met:
The vehicle is at a standstill.
There is no attempt to press the brake pedal
or accelerator pedal.
The driver seat belt is unbuckled.
The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by
pressing the brake pedal and pushing the EPB
Switch while the driver door is open. Once
manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled
again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to the OFF
position and back to ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by
an authorized dealer. You should only make
repairs for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. You should only enter
Brake Service Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
necessary for you or your technician to push the
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the
EPB system, this can only be done after
retracting the EPB actuator. Fortunately,
actuator retraction can be done easily by
entering the Brake Service Mode through the
Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This menu
based system will guide you through the steps
necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to
perform rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be
met in order to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The park brake must be unapplied.
The transmission must be in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N).
While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will
flash continuously while the ignition is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the
following steps must be followed to reset the
parking brake system to normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB Switch.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only that service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, turn the engine
OFF, and remove the key fob. When the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position, (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when
the ignition is in the OFF mode) the trans-
mission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition (in a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go)
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
KEY IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position. The key fob
can only be removed from the ignition when the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and the
transmission is locked in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be
in the ON/RUN mode (engine running or not)
and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range (PRND) is
displayed both beside the gear selector and in
the instrument cluster. To select a gear range,
push the lock button on the gear selector and
move the selector rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the
transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds).
Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
The transmission electronics are self-cali-
brating; therefore, the first few shifts on a
new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is
a normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles (kilome-
ters).
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects REVERSE
while driving forward), the position indicator
will blink continuously until the selector is
returned to the proper position, or the
requested shift can be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The nine-speed transmission has been
developed to meet the needs of current and
future FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and
calibration is refined to optimize the customer’s
driving experience and fuel economy. By design,
some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize
NINTH gear only in very specific driving
situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL
(AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be
made using the AutoStick shift control. Moving
the gear selector into the MANUAL (-/+) position
(beside the DRIVE position) activates AutoStick
mode, providing manual shift control and
displaying the current gear in the instrument
cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc.). Toggling the gear
selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the
MANUAL position will manually select the
transmission gear
Ú
page 119.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when
pushed forward), it is probably in the MANUAL
(AutoStick,(+/-)) position (beside the DRIVE
position). In MANUAL (AutoStick) mode, the
transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in
the instrument cluster. Move the gear selector
to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector
GEAR RANGES
Do not press the accelerator pedal when
shifting out of PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the
gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock
button on the gear selector and firmly move
the selector all the way forward until it stops
and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position.
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, turn the engine
OFF, and remove the key fob. When the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when
the ignition is in the OFF mode), the trans-
mission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
WARNING! (Continued)
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition (in a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go)
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must turn the igni-
tion to the ON/RUN mode, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the
gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing
for prolonged periods with the engine running.
The engine may be started in this range. Apply
the parking brake and shift the transmission
into PARK, if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
(refer to "AutoStick" in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal
operating limits, the transmission controller may
modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce
engine torque, and/or expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done
to prevent transmission damage due to
overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
“Transmission Temperature Warning Light”
may illuminate and the transmission may
operate differently until the transmission
cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission
operation may be modified depending on
engine and transmission temperature as well
as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
the torque converter clutch, and shifts into
EIGHTH or NINTH gear, are inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm Ú page 120. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for
any other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage.
If Recreational Towing see Ú page 172.
If Towing A Disabled Vehicle see Ú page 357.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
SPORT — If Equipped
This mode alters the transmission's automatic
shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift
speeds are increased to make full use of
available engine power.
SPORT mode is activated using the rotary switch
on the center console Ú page 124.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in a fixed gear,
or may remain in NEUTRAL. The Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp
Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven
to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission. If the
transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving you
more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows
you to maximize engine braking, eliminate
undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during
passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, trailer towing and many other
situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick
position (beside the DRIVE position), it can be
moved forward and rearward. This allows the
driver to manually select the transmission gear
being used. Moving the gear selector forward (-)
triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an
upshift. The current gear is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the gear
selector rearward (+) or forward (-), except as
described below.
The transmission will automatically upshift
when necessary to prevent engine over-
speed.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift to FIRST or SECOND gear (depending on
model) when coming to a stop. After a stop,
the driver should manually upshift (+) the
transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
You can start out (from a stop) in FIRST or
SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND gear
can be helpful in snow or icy conditions.
Tap the gear selector forward or rearward to
select the desired gear after the vehicle is
brought to a stop.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to overspeed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed.
Avoid using Cruise Control when AutoStick is
engaged because the transmission will not
shift automatically.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear
selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or
out of the AutoStick position at any time without
taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has
been included in the automatic transmission on
your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter
engages automatically at calibrated speeds.
This may result in a slightly different feeling or
response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically
disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to
3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the
engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the trans-
mission is not shifting properly when cold. This is
normal. The torque converter clutch will function
normally once the transmission is sufficiently
warm.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
1-SPEED FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
(4WD) — I
F EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand four-wheel
drive (4WD). The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills
required. Under normal driving conditions,
the front wheels provide most of the traction.
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power
is shifted automatically to the rear wheels.
The greater the front wheel traction loss, the
greater the power transfer to the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy
throttle input (where one may have no wheel
spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a
pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle launch
and performance characteristics.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type
tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used.
Unequal tire size may cause failure of the
power transfer unit.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
2-SPEED FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
(4WD) — I
F EQUIPPED
2-Speed 4x4 Switch
2-Speed 4x4 Switch (with Rear Lock)
The Four-Wheel Drive is fully automatic in the
normal driving mode. The Selec-Terrain buttons
provide three selectable mode positions:
4WD LOW
REAR LOCK (If Equipped)
NEUTRAL
When additional traction is required, the 4WD
LOW range position can be used to provide an
additional gear reduction, which allows for
increased torque to be delivered to both the
front and rear wheels. 4WD LOW is intended for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in
4WD LOW on dry, hard-surfaced roads may
cause increased tire wear and damage to
driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that
of the normal driving mode at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine,
and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference
will adversely affect shifting and cause damage
to the driveline components.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
SHIFT POSITIONS
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each 4WD system mode position, see the
information below:
NEUTRAL
This range disengages the driveline from the
powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle Ú page 172.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the power
transfer unit in the NEUTRAL (N) position
without first fully engaging the parking brake.
The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not
in the vehicle, unless the vehicle is otherwise
secured (for example, when attached to the
tow vehicle).
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It
provides an additional gear reduction which
allows for increased torque to be delivered to
both the front and rear wheels while providing
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NOTE:
Refer to “Selec-Terrain — If Equipped” for
further information on the various positions and
their intended usages Ú page 124.
SHIFTING PROCEDURES
Shifting Into 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
5 km/h), the ignition in the ON mode and the
engine running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL, and push the “4WD LOW” button
once. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the
instrument cluster will begin to flash and
remain on solid when the shift is complete.
4WD LOW Button
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a
message will flash from the instrument cluster
display with instructions on how to complete the
requested shift Ú page 88.
Shifting Out Of 4X4 LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
5 km/h), the ignition in the ON mode and the
engine running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL, and push the “4WD LOW” button
once. The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the
instrument cluster will flash and go out when
the shift is complete.
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a
message will flash from the instrument
cluster display with instructions on how to
complete the requested shift Ú page 88.
Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible
with the vehicle completely stopped; however,
difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch
teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth
alignment and shift completion to occur.
The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling
0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is
moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h), the 4WD
system will not allow the shift.
REAR ELECTRONIC LOCKER (E-LOCKER)
S
YSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear E-Locker System features a
mechanical locking rear differential to provide
better traction in the 4WD LOW position.
The “REAR LOCK” button is on the Selec-Terrain
Knob.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
Activating The Rear E-Locker
To activate the Rear E-Locker System, the
following conditions must be met:
1. The 4WD system must be in 4WD LOW.
2. The ignition in the ON mode and the engine
running.
3. Vehicle speed must be below 15 mph
(24 km/h).
4. To engage Rear E-Locker, push the REAR
LOCK button once.
Rear Lock Button
Deactivating The Rear E-Locker System
To deactivate the Rear E-Locker System, the
following conditions must be met:
1. Rear E-Locker must be engaged, and the
REAR LOCK indicator light on.
2. The ignition in the ON mode and the engine
running.
3. To disengage Rear E-Locker, push the REAR
LOCK button once.
NOTE:
It may also be necessary to drive slowly
steering back and forth to complete engage-
ment and disengagement of the E-Locker.
When engaging Rear E-Locker, the indicator
lights in the instrument cluster and on the
REAR LOCK button will begin to flash. When
the shift is complete the REAR LOCK indi-
cator lights will remain on.
When disengaging Rear E-Locker, the indi-
cator lights in the instrument cluster and on
the REAR LOCK button will begin to flash.
When the shift is complete the REAR LOCK
indicator lights will remain off.
Shifting into or out of Rear E-Locker is possible
with the vehicle completely stopped; however,
difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch
teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth
alignment and shift completion to occur.
The preferred method is for the vehicle to
be rolling, below 15 mph (24 km/h), while
including right and left steering maneuvers to
allow for the clutch teeth to align.
The Rear E-Locker System must be disen-
gaged prior to taking the vehicle out of 4WD
LOW range. If 4WD LOW shift conditions/
interlocks are not met, a message will flash
from the instrument cluster display with
instructions on how to complete the
requested shift.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
SELEC-TERRAIN
DESCRIPTION
Selec-Terrain allows the driver to specify the
driving surface to allow the vehicle systems to
provide the best performance possible across a
wide range of conditions.
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the
desired mode.
Selec-Terrain Switch
Selec-Terrain offers the following modes:
AUTO — Fully automatic, full time four-wheel
drive operation can be used on and off road.
Balances traction with a seamless steering
feel to provide improved handling and accel-
eration.
SNOW — Tuning set for additional stability in
inclement weather. Use when driving on
loose traction surfaces such as snow, while
either on or off-road. When in SNOW mode
(depending on certain operating conditions),
the transmission may use SECOND gear
(rather than FIRST gear) during launches, to
minimize wheel slippage.
SPORT — This mode alters the transmission's
automatic shift schedule for sportier driving.
Upshift speeds are increased to make full
use of available engine power.
NOTE:
SPORT mode is not available when 4WD LOW is
selected.
SAND/MUD — Off-road calibration for use on
low traction surfaces such as mud, sand, or
wet grass. The 4WD system provides
maximum capability to all wheels. Some
binding may be felt on high traction surfaces.
The electronic brake system will be adjusted
to reduce the automatic braking of slipping
wheels and to allow the engine to operate
without restriction.
ROCK — Off-road calibration is only available
in 4WD LOW range. Rock mode provides the
most aggressive four-wheel drive perfor-
mance for extreme off-road terrain. Use for
low speed obstacles such as large rocks,
deep ruts, etc. The driver may notice addi-
tional tire scrubbing and steering wheel feed-
back while driving in rock mode on higher
traction off-road surfaces. For use only in
off-road driving situations.
NOTE:
ROCK mode is only available on the vehicles
equipped with the Off-Road package.
Activate the Hill Descent Control or
Selec-Speed Control for steep downhill
control Ú page 263.
Instrument Cluster Display Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, a
message will appear in the instrument cluster
Ú page 88.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
POWER STEERING
The power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING”
OR “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF -
SERVICE SYSTEM” message and a
steering wheel icon are displayed on
the instrument cluster display screen, it
indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to
the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has
lost power steering assistance Ú page 96.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT -
PERFORMANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and
an icon are displayed on the instrument cluster
display screen, it indicates that extreme
steering maneuvers may have occurred, which
caused an over temperature condition in the
power steering system. You will lose power
steering assistance momentarily until the over
temperature condition no longer exists. Once
driving conditions are safe, then pull over and
let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off Ú page 96.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer
the vehicle. Under these conditions there will
be a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
STOP/START SYSTEM
The Stop/Start function was developed to
reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop
the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if
the required conditions are met. Releasing the
brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal
will automatically restart the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy
duty battery, starter, as well as other engine
parts, to handle the additional engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section Ú page 88.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear
and the brake pedal pressed.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
indicator light will illuminate indicating you
are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine running
condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if they
are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be
viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/
Start Screen. In the following situations, the
engine will not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled
Driver’s door is not closed
Battery temperature is too warm or cold
Battery charge is low
The vehicle is on a steep grade
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed
HVAC set to MAX A/C
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature
The transmission is not in a forward or
reverse gear
Hood is open
Vehicle is in 4WD LOW transfer case mode
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure with vehicle in DRIVE (D) position
Accelerator pedal input
Engine temp too high
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from
previous AUTOSTOP
Steering angle beyond threshold
ACC is on and speed is set
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system
going into a STOP/START READY state under
more extreme conditions of the items listed
above.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the throttle
pedal is pressed. The transmission will
automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission gear selector is moved out
of DRIVE, except in the PARK position
To maintain cabin temperature comfort
HVAC is set to full defrost mode
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted
Battery voltage drops too low
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed
A Stop/Start system error occurs
4WD system is put into 4WD LOW mode
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
Conditions That Force An Application Of The
Electric Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
The driver’s door is open and brake pedal
released
The driver’s door is open and the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled
The engine hood has been opened
A Stop/Start system error occurs
If the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is applied with
the engine off, the engine may require a manual
restart and the EPB may require a manual
release (press brake pedal and push EPB
switch).
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE
S
TOP/START SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will
illuminate. The “STOP/START OFF” message
will appear in the instrument cluster display and
the autostop mode will be disabled Ú page 88.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to
the ON mode every time the ignition is turned
OFF and back ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE
STOP/START SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display Ú page 96.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system:
Cruise Control for cruising at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for maintaining
a set distance between you and the vehicle
ahead using Fixed Speed Cruise Control to
automatically adjust the preset speed.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if an ACC
distance is not set, Fixed Speed Cruise Control
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
Do not place the gear selector in NEUTRAL
when Cruise Control is activated. Doing so
will disengage the system.
In order to ensure proper operation, the
Cruise Control system has been designed to
shut down if multiple speed control functions
are operated at the same time. If this occurs,
the Cruise Control system can be reactivated
by pushing the Cruise Control on/off button
and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The cruise indicator light in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn
the system off, push the on/off button a second
time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
1 — On/Off
2 — SET (+)/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET (-)/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push and
release the SET (+) or SET (-) button. Release
the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at
the selected speed. Once a speed has been set,
a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h)” will appear indicating the set speed. A
cruise indicator lamp, along with set speed will
also appear and stay on in the instrument
cluster when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Cruise Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. On steep hills, a
greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may
be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure will deactivate
the Cruise Control system without erasing the
set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Cruise Control without erasing the set speed
from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
in the OFF position, will erase the set speed
from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — I F
E
QUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by Cruise Control
while traveling on highways and major
roadways. However, it is not a safety system
and not designed to prevent collisions. The
Cruise Control function performs differently
Ú page 128.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control
engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your Cruise
Control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration
(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-
matically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis / suspension or tire size modifi-
cations to the vehicle will affect the perfor-
mance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and
Forward Collision Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control alone (an ACC
distance not set) will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the
mode selected.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active
driver involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
and weather conditions, vehicle speed,
distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe
control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering
wheel operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
Does not always fully recognize
complex driving conditions, which can
result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
and hold the vehicle in the stop position
for approximately three minutes when
following a vehicle ahead. If the vehicle
ahead does not start moving within
three minutes, the parking brake will be
activated, and the ACC system will be
cancelled.
WARNING! (Continued)
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway
construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway
off ramp; when driving on roads that
are winding, icy, snow-covered, slip-
pery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
2 — SET (+)/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET (-)/Decel
5 — Distance Increase Button
6 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
7 — Distance Decrease Button
8 — CANC/Cancel
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button until one of the following appears in the
instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is
pushed, the display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the
minimum speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at
low speeds
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of
your vehicle in close proximity
ESC Full Off Mode is active
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC
Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off
and the instrument cluster display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display will
show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
an ACC distance set. To change between the
different modes, push the ACC on/off button
which turns the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on
(changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
20 mph (20 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal
can cause the vehicle to continue to accel-
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while an ACC distance is also set, the
system will not be controlling the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In the Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead.
In addition, the proximity warning does not
activate and no alarm will sound even if you
are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected.
Be sure to maintain a safe distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be
aware which mode is selected.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed
in memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster
display will show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed
Cruise Control is being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
While in ACC mode when the vehicle comes
to a complete stop longer than two seconds,
the system will cancel. The driver will have to
apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a
standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a
stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in
close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The new
set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released.
The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button
or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the
current speed of the vehicle.
When An ACC Distance Is Also Set:
When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a
full stop when following the vehicle in front.
If your vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a
standstill, after two seconds the driver will
either have to push the RES (resume) button,
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
the ACC to the existing set speed.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal.
In addition, downshifting may occur while
climbing uphill or descending downhill.
This is normal operation and necessary to
maintain set speed. When driving uphill and
downhill, the ACC system will cancel if the
braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars
(medium) and one bar (short). Using this
distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
ahead. This distance setting appears in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
3 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Increase button and release. Each
time the button is pushed, the distance setting
increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Decrease button and release. Each
time the button is pushed, the distance setting
decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain
the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected
in the same lane, the instrument cluster display will
show the ACC Set With Target Detected Indicator
Light, and the system will adjust the vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting,
regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages Ú page 133.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will
provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC
set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the
driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be
active when passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your
vehicle to a standstill while following the vehicle
in front, if the vehicle in front starts moving
within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
without the need for any driver action.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving
within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, the driver will either have to push the
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator
pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set
speed.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
standstill for approximately three consecutive
minutes, the parking brake will be activated,
and the ACC system will be cancelled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill,
if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver
door is opened, the parking brake will be
activated, and the ACC system will be cancelled.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and also a chime
will indicate when conditions temporarily limit
system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
the above message and the system will
deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice
and snow, or tunnels with reflective tiles). The
ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
sensor is located in the center of the vehicle
behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious
not to damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see your autho-
rized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without
any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at an autho-
rized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector,
an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is
not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display, and also a
chime will indicate when conditions temporarily
limit system performance. This most often occurs
at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or
heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions,
such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on
the inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument
cluster display will read “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the
system will have degraded performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in adverse weather conditions.
The ACC/FCW system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any
vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rearview
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system
will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have
the windshield and forward facing camera
inspected at an authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster display reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable
Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable
Service Required”, there may be an internal
system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will
be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try
activating ACC again later, following an ignition
cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
stay alert and may need to intervene.
The following are examples of these types of
situations:
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not recommended when
using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no
vehicle in front detected. Once the vehicle is out
of the curve the system will resume your original
set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle
in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load,
traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills,
ACC performance may be limited.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane in which you are
traveling. In the lane changing example below,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing
lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC
may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to
the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the
lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
react in situations where the vehicle you are
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary
Ú page 423.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear, and if equipped, the front
fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when
backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a
parking maneuver). The vehicle brakes may
be automatically applied and released when
performing a reverse parking maneuver if the
system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can disable the automatic braking
function by turning ParkSense off via the
ParkSense switch. The driver can also over-
ride automatic braking by changing the gear
or by pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its
capacity during the braking event.
Automatic brakes are not available if the
vehicle is in 4WD Low.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there
is a faulted condition detected with the
ParkSense Park Assist system or the Braking
System Module.
The automatic braking function may only be
applied if the vehicle deceleration is not
enough to avoid colliding with a detected
obstacle.
The automatic braking function may not be
applied fast enough for obstacles that move
toward the rear of the vehicle from the left
and/or right sides.
The automatic braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the Customer
Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect system.
ParkSense will retain its last known configu-
ration state for the automatic braking func-
tion through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions
with detected obstacles when backing up in
REVERSE gear.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The system is provided to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the
vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
responsible for the vehicle's movements.
For limitations of this system, precautions, and
recommendations see Ú page 147.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions,
the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. The system will become
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to
speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
A display warning will appear in the instrument
cluster display if the vehicle is in REVERSE and
the speed exceeds 7 mph (11 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The six ParkSense sensors (four when vehicle is
not equipped with front sensors), located in the
rear fascia/bumper, and the six ParkSense
sensors located in the front fascia/bumper,
monitor the area in front and behind the vehicle
that is within the sensors’ field of view. The front
sensors detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm)
from the front fascia/bumper. The rear sensors
can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm)
from the rear fascia/bumper. These distances
depend on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle in the horizontal direction.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with Active Park Assist will
have six sensors in the rear fascia/bumper.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE
or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle
has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right front
or rear regions based on the object’s distance
and location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single arc in
the left and/or right rear region and the system
will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer
to the object, the display will show the single arc
moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow,
to fast, to continuous.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
Front/Rear/Side ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 11 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arcs
6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 12 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arcs
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows
the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No No No Yes Yes
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately
three seconds when an obstacle has been
detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake
pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can
be selected from the Uconnect System
Ú page 181.
The chime volume settings include low,
medium, and high.
ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from
the Customer Programmable Features section
of the Uconnect system Ú page 181.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display
Ú
page 88. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch located below the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed
to disable the system, the instrument
cluster will display the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for approximately
five seconds. When the gear selector is moved
to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
NOTE:
When ParkSense is disabled and the gear
selector is moved to the DRIVE position, no
warning message will be displayed.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service.
The ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily,
and then the LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for
five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
display a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" pop-up message for
five seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic
will be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either
the front or rear sensor location depending on
where the fault is detected. The system will
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that
is functioning properly. These arc alerts will
interrupt the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if
an object is detected within the five second
pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned
off, the instrument cluster will display
“PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the
ParkSense system off if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed
in the instrument cluster.
ParkSense should be disabled when the lift-
gate is in the open position. An opened lift-
gate could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
SIDE DISTANCE WARNING SYSTEM
The Side Distance Warning system detects the
presence of side obstacles near the vehicle
using the parking sensors located in the front
and rear bumpers.
Side Distance Warning Display
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be
displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected
from the Customer Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect system Ú page 181.
The system warns the driver with an acoustic
signal and, when enabled, with visual
indications on the instrument panel display.
NOTE:
Parksense will reduce the volume of the radio if
on when the system is sounding an audible
tone. An audible tone will only sound if a colli-
sion is possible.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
WARNING ALERTS
Distance
(inches/cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
12 –
24 inches
(30–60 cm)
Arcs-Left Flashing Flashing
Arcs-Right Flashing Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
Continuous
Fast audible
chime as the
objects get
close to the
vehicle.
Radio
Volume
Reduced
Yes Yes
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
(Continued)
Activation/Deactivation
The system can operate only after driving a
short distance and if the vehicle speed is
between 0 and 7 mph (0 and 11 km/h).
The system can be activated/deactivated via
the "Settings" menu of the Uconnect system.
If the ParkSense System is deactivated via the
ParkSense switch then the Side Distance
Warning system will automatically be
deactivated.
Message on the display for Side Distance
Warning feature:
“Wipe Sensors” — This message is displayed in
the case of a failure of the Side Distance
Warning system sensors. Free the bumpers of
any obstacles, ensure that the front and rear
fascia/bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt
and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
“System Not Available” — This message is
displayed if the Side Distance Warning system
is not available. The failed operation of the
system might be due to the insufficient voltage
from the battery or other failures on the
electrical system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the electrical
system checked.
ParkSense Usage Precautions
Some conditions may influence the
performance of the Side Distance Warning
system:
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and
other vibrations could affect the performance
of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the message
to appear in the instrument cluster display
will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the
ignition key.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper.
The presence of a tow hook without a trailer
may interfere with the correct operation of the
parking sensors. Before using the ParkSense
system, it is recommended to remove the
removable tow hook ball assembly and any
attachments from the vehicle when it is not
used for towing operations.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
intended to assist the driver during parallel,
perpendicular, and parallel park exit maneuvers
by identifying a proper parking space, providing
audible/visual instructions, and controlling the
steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the
driver maintains control of the accelerator, gear
selector and brakes. Depending on the driver's
parking maneuver selection, the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system is capable of
maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side
(i.e., driver side or passenger side), as well as
exiting a parallel parking space.
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for controlling
the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding
objects, and must intervene as required.
The system is provided to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the
driver touches the steering wheel after being
instructed to remove their hands from the
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and
the driver will be required to manually
complete the parking maneuver.
The system may not work in all conditions
(e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy
rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking
space that has surfaces that will absorb the
ultrasonic sensor waves).
New vehicles from the dealer must have at
least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
fully calibrated and performs accurately. This
is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle cali-
bration to improve the performance of the
feature. The system will also continuously
perform the dynamic vehicle calibration to
account for differences such as over or under
inflated tires and new tires.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
WARNING! (Continued)
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
P
ARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be
enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
To enable or disable the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system, push the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch
once (LED turns on). Pushing the
switch a second time will disable the system
(LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
turn off automatically for any of the following
conditions:
Parking maneuver is completed
Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph
(30 km/h) when searching for a parking
space
Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space
Steering Wheel is touched during active
steering guidance into the parking space
ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist switch
is pushed
Driver's door is opened
Rear liftgate is opened
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking
System intervention
NOTE:
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system allows
a maximum number of shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed within the maximum amount of
shifts, the system will cancel and the instru-
ment cluster display will instruct the driver to
complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
only operate and search for a parking space
when the following conditions are present:
Gear selector is in DRIVE.
Ignition is in the RUN position.
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is acti-
vated.
Driver's door is closed.
Rear liftgate is closed.
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
Vehicle not in 4WD Low (if equipped).
The outer surface and the underside of the
front and rear fascias/bumpers are clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and
then the LED will turn off if any of the above
conditions are not present.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster
display will instruct the driver to slow down. If the
vehicle is driven above approximately 18 mph
(30 km/h), the system will cancel. The driver
must then reactivate the system by pushing the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING
S
PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching -
Press or to Switch Maneuver” message
will appear in the instrument cluster display.
You may switch to perpendicular parking or
Parallel Park Exit if you desire. The arrow
buttons on the left side of the steering wheel
can be used to switch parking maneuvers.
Active ParkSense Searching
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of
the vehicle you want to perform the parking
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system will automatically search for a parking
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
The driver needs to make sure that the
selected parking space for the maneuver
remains free and clear of any obstructions
(e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the
selected parking space is suitable for the
maneuver and free/clear of anything that
may be overhanging or protruding into the
parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
When searching for a parking space, the
driver should drive as parallel or perpendic-
ular (depending on the type of maneuver) to
other vehicles as possible.
The feature will only indicate the last
detected parking space (example: if passing
multiple available parking spaces, the
system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been
found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will
be instructed to move forward to position the
vehicle for a perpendicular or parallel parking
sequence (depending on the type of maneuver
being performed).
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel.
When the vehicle comes to a standstill (your
hands still removed from the steering wheel),
you will be instructed to place the gear selector
into the REVERSE position.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
The system may then instruct the driver to wait
for steering to complete before then instructing
to check surroundings and move backward.
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space
Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space
The system may instruct several more gear
shifts (DRIVE and REVERSE), with hands off of
the steering wheel, before instructing the driver
to check surroundings and complete the
parking maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the
maneuver is complete and the driver will be
instructed to check the vehicle's parking
position, then shift the vehicle into PARK.
The message "Active ParkSense Complete -
Check Parking Position" will be displayed
momentarily.
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the
brake and accelerator during the semi-auto-
matic parking maneuver.
It is the driver's responsibility to use the
brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should
check their surroundings and be prepared to
stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or
when driver intervention is required.
When the system instructs the driver to
remove their hands from the steering wheel,
the driver should check their surroundings
and begin to back up slowly.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of six shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed within six shifts, the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then
responsible for completing the maneuver if
the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the
maneuver for any reason, the driver must
take control of the vehicle.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
EXITING THE PARKING SPACE
NOTE:
The function does not work for exiting a perpen-
dicular parking space, but only exiting parallel
parking spaces.
Activation
To activate this function, push the Active
ParkSense switch once. After selection, the
system activates and warns the driver on the
instrument panel display about the operations
that have to be carried out to perform the
maneuver correctly.
Selection Of The Maneuver Side
Use the direction indicators to choose the
direction that you want to perform the maneuver.
Use the right arrow indicator to perform the
maneuver to the right side and use the left arrow
indicator to perform the maneuver to the left.
During the maneuver, the system instructs the
driver to shift to REVERSE, and operate the turn
signal in the direction you want to exit. Let go
of the steering wheel and use the brake or
accelerator pedals as instructed, while the
system handles the steering automatically for
exiting the parking space. If the driver continues
to carry out a voluntary or involuntary action on
the steering wheel during the exit maneuver
(touching or holding the steering wheel to prevent
its movement), the maneuver will be interrupted.
Shift To Reverse Then Move Backward
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing
parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers
even when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system. Always check carefully behind
and in front of your vehicle, look behind and
in front of you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up and moving forward. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention
to your surroundings. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
only a parking aid and it is unable to recog-
nize every obstacle, including small obsta-
cles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles
located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
Shift To Drive Then Move Forward
End Of Maneuver
The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the
display shows the message of a completed
maneuver. At the end of the maneuver, the
system gives back the vehicle control to the
driver.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
forward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a
haptic warning in the form of torque applied to
the steering wheel, as well as a visual warning
in the instrument cluster display, to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying force into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and
the driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
visual warning through the instrument cluster
display to prompt the driver to remain within the
lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a
haptic or a torque warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provide an
audible and visual warning to the driver if
removed. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on
the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense
On” message is shown in the instrument cluster
display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state, on or off, from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the
ON/RUN position.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument
cluster display.
Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
have not been detected and the LaneSense
telltale is solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
from white to gray, the left thin line remains
solid white and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line/
Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been
detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane depar-
ture occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left thick lane line and the
left thin line turn solid white. The LaneSense
telltale changes from solid green to solid
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of
the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid White Thick Line, Solid White Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
from white to gray, the left thin line remains
solid white and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow.
At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line,
Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If
Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
have not been detected and the LaneSense
telltale is solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
from yellow to gray, the left thin line remains
solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow To Gray Thick
Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been
detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane depar-
ture occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left thick lane line and left
thin line turn solid yellow. The LaneSense tell-
tale changes from solid green to solid
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of
the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
yellow (on/off) and the left thin line remains
solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow.
At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust
the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) that you
can configure through the Uconnect system
Ú page 181.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
The warnings are disabled with use of the
turn signal.
The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward
Collision Warning, etc.).
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed in the touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check entire
surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above
the rear license plate.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may
be selected through the Uconnect system
Ú page 181.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the previous screen
appears. When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the
camera image will continue to be displayed
for up to 10 seconds unless the following
conditions occur: the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position, or the touchscreen button “X” to
disable the display of the Rear View Camera is
pressed.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to turn
the Rear View Camera system on.
NOTE:
If the Rear View Camera was manually acti-
vated, the timer will start again only after the
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will
be displayed continuously until deactivated
via the touchscreen button “X”, the vehicle is
shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
The touchscreen button “X” to disable display
of the camera image is made available ONLY
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle
and its projected backup path based on the
steering wheel position. A dashed center line
overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of The
Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth.
Do not cover the lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors
inside the pipe seal the system.
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the
rear edge of the fuel door.
Fuel Door
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe;
the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door
while refueling.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is
full.
Fuel Filler
4. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds
after nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from
the nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side
door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR), and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on
this label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour
of manufacture. The bar code that appears on
the bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Total load must be
limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are
not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load
on the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full
GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with
no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle.
The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants
or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store the heavier items down low and be sure
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all
loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo,
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR
Ú page 162.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables, and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in
or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in
combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to
“Vehicle Loading” Ú page 162 for further
information.
WARNING!
If the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is 3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg) or more, it is mandatory to use a
weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable
handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard
weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control
of your vehicle and cause a collision.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link
that can be installed between the hitch receiver
and the trailer tongue that typically provides
adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are commonly
used to tow small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling,
stability, braking performance, and could
result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow, and should be used to assist you
in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lbs (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
Engine/Transmission Model Frontal Area
Maximum GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Maximum Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
2.0L Automatic FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
2.0L Automatic With Trailer Tow
Package
FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 4,000 lbs (1,814 kg) 400 lbs (181 kg)
2.4L Automatic With Or Without
Trailer Tow Package
FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
3.2L Automatic FWD or 4WD 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
3.2L Automatic With Trailer Tow
Package
FWD or 4WD 39.44 sq ft (3.66 sq m) 4,500 lbs (2,041 kg) 450 lbs (204 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced
on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to
the Tire And Loading Information placard for the
maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle Ú page 392.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended:
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely
side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers
heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
collisions.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow
these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and that it will not shift during travel.
When trailering cargo that is not fully
secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that
may be difficult for the driver to control. You
could lose control of your vehicle and have
a collision.
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance, or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure, or tires.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
Refer to Tires for further information
Ú page 395.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the frame or hook
retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. Always
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to
a trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away
from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE (D) range can be selected when
towing. The transmission controls include a
drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when
towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, use the AutoStick shift control to
select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
This action will also provide better engine
braking.
AutoStick — If Equipped
When using the AutoStick shift control, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate
performance and avoids frequent down-
shifts. For example, choose “5” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce
vehicle speed as necessary to avoid
extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and
road conditions allow.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Battery
2 — Back up Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
4X4 Models
Towing
Condition
Wheels OFF
the Ground
Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models
1-Speed Power
Transfer Unit
2-Speed Power Transfer Unit
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions:
Transmission in PARK
Power transfer unit in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement.
The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
F
RONT-WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) M ODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for front-wheel drive
models) is allowed ONLY if the front wheels are
OFF the ground. This may be accomplished
using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow
dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake. Place transmission
in PARK. Turn the engine off.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the
dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
5. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but
do not start the engine.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Release the parking brake.
8. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob,
and release the brake pedal.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
4
X4 MODELS WITH 1-SPEED POWER
T
RANSFER UNIT
Recreational towing is not allowed. These
models do not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in
the power transfer unit.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF
the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing with the front wheels on the ground
will cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on
the ground can cause severe transmission
and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING — 4X4
M
ODELS WITH 2-SPEED POWER
T
RANSFER UNIT
The power transfer unit must be shifted into
NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission must be in
PARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL (N)
selection button is adjacent to the 4WD selector
switch. Shifts into and out of NEUTRAL (N) can
take place with the selector switch in any mode
position.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to shift the 4WD
system into NEUTRAL (N).
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4x4 vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmission
and/or power transfer unit damage. Tow
with all four wheels either ON the ground, or
OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the power transfer unit.
The transmission must be in PARK for
recreational towing.
Before recreational towing, perform the
procedure outlined under “Shifting into
NEUTRAL (N)” to be certain that the power
transfer unit is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Other-
wise, internal damage will result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or power transfer unit damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The fascia/bumper
face bar will be damaged.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the power
transfer unit in the NEUTRAL (N) position
without first fully engaging the parking brake.
The NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both
the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle, unless the
vehicle is otherwise secured (for example,
when attached to the tow vehicle).
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the power transfer unit is fully in
NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to
prevent damage to internal parts.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on
level ground, and shift the transmission to
PARK.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but
do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed NEUTRAL (N) button
(located by the selector switch) for four
seconds. The light behind the N symbol will
blink, indicating shift in progress. The light
will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the
shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete.
Neutral Button
7. After the shift is completed and the
NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the
NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
11. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
12. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
13. Apply the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into PARK, turn the
engine off, and remove the key fob.
15. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
16. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but
do not start the engine.
17. Press and hold the brake pedal.
18. Release the parking brake.
19. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob,
and release the brake pedal.
NOTE:
When towing this vehicle behind another
vehicle, the parking brake must be released.
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must
be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N)
button, and must continue to be met until the
shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the
NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indi-
cator light will flash continuously until all
requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL (N)
button is released.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop,
leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but
do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed power transfer unit
NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector
switch) for one second.
Neutral Button
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns
off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been
released, the power transfer unit will shift to
the position indicated by the selector switch.
NOTE:
When shifting the power transfer unit out of
NEUTRAL (N), the engine should remain off to
avoid gear clash.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release
the brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
16. Re-enable the Auto Park Brake feature, if
desired.
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N)
button, and must continue to be met until the
shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the
NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator
light will flash continuously until all require-
ments are met or until the NEUTRAL (N)
button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
and a narrower track to make them capable
of performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics
give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is
a better view of the road, allowing you to
anticipate problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as conventional
passenger cars any more than sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for
additional traction and control on slippery or
difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep
hills, and to increase low-speed pulling power
(refer to “All Wheel Drive and Four-Wheel Drive
Operation” in this section for further details). This
range should be limited to extreme situations
such as deep snow, mud, or sand where
additional low speed pulling power is needed.
Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h)
should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through water, there are a number of
precautions that must be considered before
entering the water:
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to
determine the depth and the bottom condition
(and location of any obstacles) prior to entering.
Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in
deep water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in
storm run-off) avoid crossing until the water
level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced.
If you must cross flowing-water, avoid depths in
excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing water
can erode the streambed causing your vehicle
to sink into deeper water. Determine exit
point(s) that are downstream of your entry point
to allow for drifting.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth
before entering as a precaution, and check all
fluids afterward. Driving through water may
cause damage that may not be covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than
16 inches (40.5 cm), and reduce speed
appropriately to minimize wave effects.
Maximum speed in 16 inches (40.5 cm) of
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
(Trailhawk only): Avoid driving in standing water
deeper than 19 inches (48 cm), and reduce
speed appropriately to minimize wave effects.
Maximum speed in 19 inches (48 cm) of water
is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect
your vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine,
transmission, Power Transfer Unit, and Rear
Drive Module) to ensure they have not been
contaminated. Contaminated fluids and
lubricants (milky, foamy in appearance) should
be flushed/changed as soon as possible to
prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for
additional control at slower speeds, shift the
transmission to a low gear and shift the 4WD
system to the appropriate terrain mode, using
4WD LOW if necessary Ú page 120. Only shift
into a lower gear to maintain forward motion.
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels
and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads
because engine braking may cause skidding
and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the
transmission to a lower gear and shift the 4WD
System to 4WD LOW. Use FIRST gear and 4WD
LOW for very steep hills.
NOTE:
Brakes should be applied at increased slippage,
but before coming to a stop to avoid digging into
the loose surface and rendering the operator of
the vehicle stuck/immobile.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come
to a stop and immediately apply the brakes.
Once stopped, shift to REVERSE. Back slowly
down the hill allowing the compression braking
of the engine to help regulate your speed. If the
brakes are required to control vehicle speed,
apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding
the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or
grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so
may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle.
Always back straight down a hill in REVERSE
gear carefully. Never back down a hill in
NEUTRAL using only the brake.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
NOTE:
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill
- drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the
crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and
maintain headway by turning the front wheels
slowly left and right. This may provide a fresh
“bite” into the surface and may provide traction
to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the
4WD System to 4WD LOW range or Select Hill
Descent Control if equipped Ú page 263. Let
the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four
wheels turning against engine compression
drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle
speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of
braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking
by downshifting the transmission whenever
possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
for damage.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness,
particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo-
nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten
them, if required, and torque to the values
specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand,
water, or similar dirty conditions, have the
radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake
linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
Impacted material can cause wheel imbal-
ance. Freeing the wheels of impacted mate-
rial will likely rectify imbalance condition.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the braking
system may cause excessive wear or
unpredictable braking performance. Full
braking power may not be available to prevent
a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, inspect and clean
the braking components as soon as possible.
4
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180
(Continued)
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4/4C/4C NAV with 8.4-inch Display system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices,
your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems
to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
MULTIMEDIA 181
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information
and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data
Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement or Ú page 106.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the Customer Programmable Features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons
On Faceplate And Buttons On Touchscreen
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display,
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display, and the
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to display
the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
All settings should be changed with the igni-
tion in the ON/RUN position.
When making a selection, only press one button
at a time to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting “option” until a check mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Once the setting is complete,
press the X button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or
Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 MULTIMEDIA
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system
will display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of
the touchscreen. The available settings are:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system.
The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the
system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system
automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will
allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
MULTIMEDIA 183
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will
display in the instrument cluster display and navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
Keyboard
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable
keyboards are ABCDEF Keyboard, QWERTY Keyboard, and AZERTY
Keyboard.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically
after five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L),
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), or “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of
measurement independently.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
Setting Name
Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition
system. The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from
the system. The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description
from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the command list on or off. The “Always”
setting will show the command list. The “With Help” setting will show the
command list and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the command list off.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system.
The system will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time And Format/Time Format
This setting will allow you set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With
GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will
set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to
a 24-hour format.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
MULTIMEDIA 185
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the
minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the date.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Descriptions
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the rear backup camera when shifting out
of reverse.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the active backup camera guidelines on or off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the fixed backup camera guidelines on or off.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These
options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access
a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW
system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is
detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the
object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision system on or off. The “Off”
setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will
provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning
+ Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply brake
pressure when a collision is detected.
LaneSense Warning
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will
provide lane departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”,
“Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback
during a lane departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and
“High”.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
MULTIMEDIA 187
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected. The “Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when
an object is detected. The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both
an audible chime and a visual display when an object is detected.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system.
The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system.
The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
This setting will provide braking assist if the Rear ParkSense system
senses a collision with an object.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is
detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot
Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the
outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights
on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the backup camera guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the rear backup camera when shifting out
of reverse.
Setting Name Description
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Mirror & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
Side Distance Warning
This setting will turn the Side Distance Warning on or off and set how the
system will communicate with the user. The “Off” setting will deactivate
the system. The “Sound” setting will provide an audible chime to the user.
The “Sound And Display” setting will provide both an audible chime and a
visual display.
Side Distance Warning Volume This setting will adjust the volume of the Side Distance Warning system.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse This Setting will tilt the mirrors when the vehicle is placed in REVERSE.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
MULTIMEDIA 189
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchased.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available
settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings
are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when
the Lock button is pushed on the key fob.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from
the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn on or off the flashing of the lights when
the Lock button is pushed on the key fob.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the
key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button
is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the
Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from
the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key
fob are needed to open all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only
unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All
Doors” setting will unlock all doors on the first push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless
Enter-N-Go) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that
have been linked to the key fob.
Power Liftgate Alert This setting will allow you to turn the Power Liftgate on or off.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
MULTIMEDIA 191
Seats & Comfort
When the Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote
start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options
When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shut off.
These settings will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle
Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats
(if equipped) or heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the
comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Engine Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine
is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain
on after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount
of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension
This setting will automatically lower the vehicle ride height for easier
entry and exit of the vehicle.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change
the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/
back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set
audio location.
Equalizer
This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher
setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up.
The available setting are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through
the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play
This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
MULTIMEDIA 193
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external
audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the instrument
cluster display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The following
settings are Auto Reply (both, text, call), Auto Reply Message (custom,
default), and Custom Auto Reply Message (create message).
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can
be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune
to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel
list will display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM®
Travel Link is a separate subscription.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
MULTIMEDIA 195
Clear Personal Data/Restore Settings
When the Clear Personal Data/Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect
system back to its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
System Information
When the System Information Button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
Reset App Drawer This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all
personal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and
presets.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
1 — Radio Button
2 — Compass Button
3 — Media Button
4 — Settings Button
5 — Phone Button
6 — More Button
7 — Volume & On/Off
8 — Mute Button
9 — Screen Off Button
10 — Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob
1 — Radio Button
2 — Media Button
3 — Climate Button
4 — Apps Button
5 — Controls Button
6 — Phone Button
7 — Settings Button
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
MULTIMEDIA 197
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode and access the radio functions and
external audio sources Ú page 199.
Phone Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free phone system Ú page 213.
Settings
Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 181.
Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll
Push the Enter/Browse button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted selection on the screen. Rotate the
Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a radio station.
Screen Off Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Mute
Push the Mute button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system off. Press it again to turn the audio
back on.
Volume & On/Off
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off button on the faceplate to turn the system
on and off.
Feature Description
Compass Press the Compass button to access the vehicle’s compass.
More Press the More button to access additional options.
Feature Description
Controls Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated seats and steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Uconnect apps.
Climate Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate control functions Ú page 55.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 MULTIMEDIA
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily customized for your
preference. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop
1. Press the Apps button to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app
to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using
the system. It contains instructions on how to
use the system in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the
touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety precautions.
Failure to do so may result in injury or property
damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. See an authorized dealer for
repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use
the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage
to the system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
MULTIMEDIA 199
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
etc.), which could scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly
on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber
lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the
touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and
directions Ú page 423.
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the
three and nine o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push button in the center and controls
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for
the next available station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next
available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go
forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch
goes to the beginning of the current track, or
the beginning of the previous track if it is within
eight seconds after the current track begins to
play. Double pressing the bottom button switch
will skip to the previous track if it is after eight
seconds into the current track.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to
enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected
by pressing the corresponding buttons in Radio
Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the Volume & On/Off control knob to turn
on and off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns
continuously (360 degrees) in either direction,
without stopping. Turning the Volume & On/Off
control knob clockwise increases the volume,
and counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
played.
Mute Button
Push the Mute button to mute or unmute the
system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.
1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — All Preset Radio Stations
3 — Seek Up
4 — Audio Settings
5 — Station Info
6 — Tune
7 — Radio Band (AM/FM)
8 — Seek Down
1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — View Next Preset Radio Stations
3 — Status Bar
4 — Bottom Menu Bar
5 — Audio Settings
6 — Seek Up
7 — Tune Button
8 — Seek Down
9 — Browse Button
10 — Radio Bands
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
MULTIMEDIA 201
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated
by pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pressing the left steering
wheel audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek
Down button to tune the radio to the next
available station or channel. During a Seek
Up/Down function, if the radio reaches the
starting station after passing through the entire
band two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press, hold, and then release the Seek Up or
Seek Down button to advance the radio
through the available stations or channels at a
faster rate. The radio stops at the next available
station or channel when the button on the
touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
Info — If Equipped
Press the Info button to display information
related to the currently playing song and radio
station.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of
the radio screen to directly tune to a desired
radio station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired
station. Once a number has been entered,
any numbers that are no longer possible
(stations that cannot be reached) will
become deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been
entered, press “GO”. The Direct Tune screen will
close, and the system will automatically tune to
that station.
Radio Voice Commands
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel
and wait for the beep to say a command.
See some examples below.
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “Help”. The
system provides you with a list of commands.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and bill
at then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at
866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM®
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com
(US) or
www.siriusxm.ca
(Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change.
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
USA and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is
also available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite
service area and in AK. © 2020 SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground
parking garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US visit siriusxm.com/
getallaccess or call: 1-800-643-2112
Canada visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or call:
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
(French).
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
MULTIMEDIA 203
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the
top of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed
in the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are
displayed below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions
common to all radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather button, and Favorite button functions
are available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store
and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
switched, content in replay memory is lost.
1 — Browse
2 — Radio Bands
3 — Direct Tune
4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
1 — Browse
2 — Replay
3 — Seek Down Button
4 — Direct Tune Button
5 — Seek Up Button
6 — Audio Settings Button
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 MULTIMEDIA
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The play/pause, rewind/forward and live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen
to activate the favorites menu, which will time
out within 20 seconds in absence of user
interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of
the X button.
The favorites feature enables you to set a
favorite artist or song that is currently playing.
The radio then uses this information to alert you
when either the favorite artist or song is being
played at any time by any of the SiriusXM®
Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite artist, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist
button on the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite song, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Song
button on the touchscreen.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing of live or rewound
content at any time. Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play again button on
the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in steps of five
seconds. Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds
rewinds the content. The radio begins playing the content at the point at which the
press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen forwards the content in steps of
five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be done when the content is
previously rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live content. A continuous press
of the Forward button on the touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio begins
playing the content at the point at which the press is release.
Live Live Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the playing of live content.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
MULTIMEDIA 205
Browse In SXM
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Browse Button
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen.
When pressing the All button, the following
categories become available:
Channel List Press the Channel List to display
all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by oper-
ating the Tune/Scroll knob.
Genre List Press the Genre button on the
touchscreen to display a list of Genres. You
can select any desired Genre by pressing the
Genre List. The radio tunes to a channel with
the content in the selected Genre.
Presets — If Equipped
Press the Presets button (if equipped) located
at the left of the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the Tune/Scroll knob as well.
Preset Selection
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse
button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the
currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the
Radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset.
Deleting A Preset
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse
screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit
the Favorites list and to configure the Alert
Settings, along with providing a list of Channels
currently airing any of the items in the Favorites
list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the
Up and Down arrows located at the right side of
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by
operating the Tune/Scroll knob as well.
1 — All Button
2 — Presets Button
3 — Favorites Button
4 — Game Zone Button
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 MULTIMEDIA
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or
press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu
allows you to choose from a visual alert or
audible and visual alert when one of your
favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the
left of the Browse screen. This feature provides
you with the ability to select teams, edit the
selection, and set alerts.
On Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen.
The On-Air list provides a list of Channels
currently airing any of the items in the
Selections list, and pressing any of the items
in the list tunes the radio to that channel.
Select Team Or Add/Delete — If Equipped
Press the Select Team or Add/Delete button on
the touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list.
Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all
teams within the league will appear, then you can
select a team by pressing the corresponding box.
A check mark appears for all teams that are
chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or
press the Trash Can icon next to the selection to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music channel
using one of the 12 presets. This feature occurs
the first time the preset is selected during that
current song.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
MULTIMEDIA 207
Setting Presets
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pressing any of the Preset
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save
as a preset, press and hold the numbered
button on the touchscreen for more than
two seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio Modes.
A total of six presets will appear on the screen.
You can switch between the radio presets list by
pressing the Arrow button located in the upper
right of the radio touchscreen.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display:
A set of four presets will appear on the screen.
Press the All button to view all saved presets.
To remove a saved preset, a new preset must
be saved over the old one.
Preset Features — If Equipped
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is
entered by pushing the Enter/Browse button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can
scroll the preset list by rotation of the Tune/
Scroll knob or by pressing the Up and Down
Arrow keys, located on the right of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse
button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the
currently highlighted Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
stored in the Presets.
Deleting Presets
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 MULTIMEDIA
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen by
pressing the X button or the Back Arrow button
when in the Browse Presets screen.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
The audio settings can also be accessed on
the Radio Mode screen by pressing the Audio
button. You can return to the Radio screen by
pressing the X button.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound
5 — Loudness
6 — AUX Volume Offset
7 — Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound
5 — Loudness
6 — AUX Volume Offset
7 — Radio Off With Door
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
MULTIMEDIA 209
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between the front
speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers. Press the Front, Rear,
Left or Right buttons or press and drag the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease each of
the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is
displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from Off, 1, 2, or 3. This alters the
automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation to vehicle speed. Volume
increases automatically as speed increases to compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction as in a
movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This alters the AUX input
audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed
above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play — If Equipped
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is connected to
one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press Off to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or
passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay selected time has expired.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or
Source Select button on the touchscreen and
the desired mode button on the touchscreen.
USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the Media
sources available. When available, you can
select the Browse button on the touchscreen to
be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the
Info button on the touchscreen for artist
information on the current song playing.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media
Mode is entered by pushing the Media button
located on the faceplate.
1 — Seek Down
2 — Seek Up
3 — Additional Functions
4 — Info
5 — Pause/Play
6 — Source
7 — Browse
1 — Repeat
2 — Track Time
3 — Shuffle
4 — Info
5 — Tracks
6 — Bluetooth®
7 — Select Source
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
MULTIMEDIA 211
Types of Media Modes
USB Mode
Overview
USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
device into the USB Port, or by selecting the USB
button on the left side of the touchscreen, or the
Source Select/Select Source button and then
selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped) or by pressing
the Media button on the faceplate and then
selecting the USB button.
On the Uconnect 3 with 5-inch Display, if you
insert a USB device with the ignition ON, the unit
will switch to USB Mode and begin to play.
The display will show the track number and
index time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track 1.
Bluetooth® Mode
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth®
Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth®
device, containing music, to the Uconnect
system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device
must be paired to the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect system.
On the Uconnect 3 with 5-inch Display, push the
Media button located on the faceplate. Once in
Media Mode, press the Source button on the
touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button
Ú page 213.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the
Bluetooth® button on the left side of the
touchscreen or under the Source Select/Select
Source button (if equipped).
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Select Source
AUX Mode
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio
jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX
button on the left side of the touchscreen, or
under the Source Select button (if equipped) or
pushing the Media button on the faceplate and
then selecting the Source button and then the
AUX button.
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX Port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and
the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode
and begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
Volume button, Volume/Mute rotary knob, or
the On/Off rotary knob, or with the volume of
the attached device.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device. Press and release the Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or to return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the
USB device is within the first three seconds of
the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the
Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the
next selection on the Bluetooth® device.
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
current selection, or return to the beginning of
the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device
is within the first second of the current
selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to display the browse window.
In USB Mode, the left side of the browse window
displays a list of ways you can browse through
the contents of the USB device. If supported by
the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist,
Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired
button on the touchscreen on the left side of the
screen. The center of the browse window shows
items and its sub-functions, which can be
scrolled through by pressing the Up and Down
buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob can
also be used to scroll.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate the
Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll
through and select a desired track on the device.
Press the Exit button on the touchscreen if you
wish to cancel the Browse function.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
the touchscreen to select the desired audio
source: Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality.
The Repeat button on the touchscreen is
highlighted when active. The Radio will continue
to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button
again to enter Repeat All. The radio will continue
to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as long
as the repeat function is active. To cancel
Repeat, press the Repeat button a third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
Audio button Ú page 200.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
MULTIMEDIA 213
Info
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Info
button on the touchscreen to display the
current track information. Press the Info or X
button on the touchscreen a second time to
cancel this feature.
Tracks
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Tracks
button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up
with the Song List. The song currently playing is
indicated by an arrow and lines above and
below the song title. When in the Tracks List
screen you can rotate the Tune/Scroll knob to
highlight a track (indicated by the line above
and below the track name) and then push the
Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
supports this feature, press the Tracks button
on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with
the Song List. The currently playing song is
indicated by a red arrow and lines above and
below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
Media Voice Commands
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth®, and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice
operation is only available for connected USB
and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering
wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match
exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre
information is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
It allows you to dial a phone number with your
mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John
Smith Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search
for John Smith Mobile”).
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 MULTIMEDIA
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so
they are easily accessible on the Main Phone
screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent
Call logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
easy access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using
the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you
to mute the system's microphone for private
conversation.
The Phone feature is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different
electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you
phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and
has been paired to the Uconnect system. Up to
10 mobile phones or audio devices are allowed
to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can
be used with the system at a time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel is
used to get into the Phone Mode and make
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls,
view phonebook, etc. When you press the
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your
signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you
are already in a call or want to make another
call.
The button on your steering wheel is also
used to access the Voice Commands for the
Uconnect Voice Command features if your
vehicle is equipped.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
MULTIMEDIA 215
Phone Operation
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu
structure. Voice commands are required after
most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two
general methods for how Voice Command
works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command
and then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must
wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen”
prompt or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound
commands can be used. For example,
instead of saying “Call” and then “John
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John
Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the
voice command is given. You can also break
the commands into parts and say each part
of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound
command form voice command “Search for
John Smith,” or you can break the
compound command form into two voice
commands: “Search Contacts” and when
asked, “John Smith.” Please remember, the
Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in
a normal conversational tone, as if speaking
to someone sitting a few feet/meters away
from you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR)
engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences.
The system filters out certain non-word
utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.”
The system handles fill-in words such as
“I would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone
call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in
the same phrase or sentence, the system
identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do
you want to call?” in the case where a phone
call was requested but the specific name was
not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system requires more information from the
user, it will ask a question to which the user can
respond without pushing the Voice Command
button on the steering wheel.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
want to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
simply push the Phone button (if active) on your
steering wheel and say a command or say
“Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a push
of the VR button or the Phone button on the
touchscreen or Phone button on the radio
faceplate.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 MULTIMEDIA
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone
button on your steering wheel when the system
is listening for a command and be returned to
the main or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need
to reference your mobile phone’s manual.
Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow the steps below to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently
connected with the system, a pop-up will
appear asking if you would like to pair a
mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters Phone Mode and no other device(s)
have previously been paired. If the system
has a phone previously paired, even if no
phone is currently connected with the
system, this pop-up will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
MULTIMEDIA 217
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the
PIN from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or
Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system will
reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The most recent phone
paired will have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
system to access your “messages” and
“contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
your contacts with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Ucon-
nect system may interfere with the Bluetooth®
connection. If this happens, simply repeat the
pairing process. However, first make sure to
delete the device from the list of phones on your
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
For information on how to pair a Bluetooth®
streaming audio device with the Uconnect 3
with 5-inch Display radio Ú page 216.
1. Press the Media button on the
touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 MULTIMEDIA
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
touchscreen to display the Paired Audio
Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
prompted on the device, confirm the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices
within range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The most recent device
paired will have the higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to
bring up a list of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
Device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or audio device follow these
steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Disconnecting or Deleting A Phone Or Audio
Device
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — Disconnect Device Or Disconnect Phone
2 — Make Favorite
3 — Delete Device/Phone
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
MULTIMEDIA 219
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or
Settings button.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name for a different
phone or audio device than the currently
connected device or press the preferred
Connected Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources
screen, press the Settings button located
to the right of the device name for a
different phone or audio device than the
currently connected device or press the
preferred Connected Phone from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone
has the ability to download contact names and
number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. Your mobile phone may receive a
pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect
system to access your messages and contacts.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website,
UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook, follow the procedure in the
“Voice Command” in this section.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
after you start the vehicle.
1 — Disconnect Device Or Disconnect Phone
2 — Make Favorite
3 — Delete Device/Phone
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 MULTIMEDIA
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
four numbers per contact will be downloaded
and updated every time a phone is
connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay
before the latest downloaded names can be
used. Until then, if available, the previously
downloaded phonebook is available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Managing Your Favorites — If Equipped
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen,
and then press one of the +Add Favorite
Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
Contacts from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press
the Down Arrow button next to the selected
number to display the options pop-up. In the
pop-up, select Add to Favorites.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
To Remove A Favorite — If Equipped
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”
from the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon next to
the contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for
that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the
Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are
available and supported by Bluetooth® on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
service plan provides three-way calling, this
feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
Listed below are the phone options with
Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
MULTIMEDIA 221
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the
following call features:
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
Key Pad Number Entry
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and
press Dial/Call.
Recent Calls — If Equipped
You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your steering
wheel and perform the above operation.
For example, say “Show my incoming calls”.
1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Transfer
4 — Ignore
1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Transfer
4 — Join Calls
5 — End
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 MULTIMEDIA
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system. Push the Phone button on the
steering wheel, press the Answer button on the
touchscreen.
You can also press the Caller ID box to place the
current call on hold or answer the incoming call.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold
and answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is
in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer
an incoming call or ignore it.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while Do Not
Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
MULTIMEDIA 223
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On
Hold button on the Phone main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
dial a number from the keypad (if supported by
your mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or
from the phonebooks.
Toggling Between Calls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Swap Calls button on the
phone main screen. Only one call can be placed
on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and
one on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls Call
button the Phone main screen to combine all
calls into a conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone
End button on the steering wheel. Only the active
call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on
hold, it will become the new active call.
Redial
Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
that was dialed from your mobile phone.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 MULTIMEDIA
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
ignition has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-
mended to press the Transfer button on the
touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your connected mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the
Transfer button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is
speaking during a voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Condition
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not
always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names
in your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is
in motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may not
be supported.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
MULTIMEDIA 225
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook
button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com
for mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep
to say a command. See some examples below:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123 456 7890”
“Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
“Call back” (call previously answered
incoming phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice
Command, push the Phone button and say
“Call”, then pronounce the name exactly as it
appears in your phone book. When a contact
has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce incoming text
messages. Push the VR button or Phone
button and say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an
incoming text message. (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messag-
es and follow the system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose
the message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have
the full implementation of the Message Access
Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature.
For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on
your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s®
“User Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not
compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is
equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone®
connected to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri
lets you use your voice to send text messages,
select media, place phone calls and much
more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds
back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep,
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone
is recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON
mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either
the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language
change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior
to using the system
Ú
page 423.
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — IF
EQUIPPED
ANDROID AUTO™
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android™ 5.0 or higher
powered smartphone with a data plan, that
allows you to project your smartphone and a
number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto™ brings you useful
information, and organizes it into simple cards
that appear just when they are needed. Android
Auto™ can be used with Google's best-in-class
speech technology, the steering wheel
controls, the knobs and buttons on your
radio faceplate, and the radio display’s
touchscreen to control many of your apps.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
MULTIMEDIA 227
To use Android Auto™, follow the following
procedure:
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
Google Play store on your Android™-powered
smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered
smartphone to one of the media USB ports
in your vehicle. If the Android Auto™ app
was not downloaded, the first time you plug
your device in the app begins to download.
Your vehicle should be in PARK the first time
you use the app.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable
that came with your phone, as aftermarket
cables may not work.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio
screen. Data plan rates apply.
3. Once the device is connected and
recognized, the Phone icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Android
Auto™ icon.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately
once a compatible device is connected. You can
also launch it by pressing the Android Auto™
icon on the touchscreen.
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc.
for music
Hands-free calling and texting for communi-
cation
Various compatible apps
Maps
Push and hold the Voice Recognition
(VR) button on the steering wheel
until the beep or tap the Microphone
icon to ask Google to take you to a
desired destination by voice. You can also touch
the Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access
other navigation apps.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
provides voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 MULTIMEDIA
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/ (US) or https://
www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/ (Canada).
For further information on the navigation
function, please refer to https://
support.google.com/android or https://
support.google.com/androidauto/.
Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access,
stream, and play your favorite music
with apps like Google Play Music,
iHeartRadio, Spotify, and any audio
playable application. Using your smartphone’s
data plan, you can stream endless music on the
road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set
up on your smartphone prior to using Android
Auto™ for them to work with Android Auto™.
NOTE:
To see the track details for the music playing
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
system’s media screen.
For further information, refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, push
and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel to activate voice recognition
specific to Android Auto™. This allows
you to send and reply to text messages, have
incoming text messages read out loud, and place
and receive hands-free calls.
Apps
The Android Auto™ App displays all the
compatible apps that are available to use
with Android Auto™, every time it is launched.
You must have the compatible app
downloaded, and you must be signed in to the
app through your mobile device for it to work
with Android Auto™.
Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list
of available apps for Android Auto™.
Android Auto™ Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your Android™-powered
smartphone and a number of its apps onto your
Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™
5.0 or higher to one of the media USB ports,
using the factory-provided USB cable, and press
the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
“Microphone” icon within Android Auto™, to
activate Android’s™ VR, which recognizes
natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
MULTIMEDIA 229
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 or higher and download app on
Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™, and
Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
APPLE CARPLAY®
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are
using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in
Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for
the very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning
cable that came with your phone, as after-
market cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and
recognized, the Phone icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Apple
CarPlay® Icon.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately.
You can also launch it by pressing the Apple
CarPlay® icon on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular
data is turned on, and that you are in an area
with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular
coverage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen. Data plan rates apply.
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to
activate a Siri voice recognition
session. You can also press and hold
the Home button within Apple CarPlay® to start
talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls or
listen to voicemail as you normally would using
Siri on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
steering wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR
session, not a Siri session, and it will not func-
tion with Apple CarPlay®.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 MULTIMEDIA
Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access
all your artists, playlists, and music
from iTunes® or any third party
application installed on your device.
Using your iPhone’s® data plan, you can also
use select third party audio apps including
music, news, sports, podcasts, and more.
Messages
Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel to activate a Siri voice
recognition session. Apple CarPlay®
allows you to use Siri to send or reply
to text messages. Siri can also read incoming
text messages, but drivers will not be able to
read messages, as everything is done via voice.
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel until the beep or tap
the Microphone icon to ask Apple®
Siri to take you to a desired
destination by voice. You can also touch the
Navigation icon in Apple CarPlay® to access
Apple® Maps.
Apps
The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible
apps that are available to use, every time it is
launched. You must have the compatible app
downloaded, and you must be signed in to the
app through your mobile device for it to work
with Apple CarPlay®.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
(US) or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/
carplay/ (Canada) to see the latest list of
available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay®
features may not be available in every region
and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your iPhone® and a number
of its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen.
Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher to one of the
media USB ports, using the factory-provided
Lightning cable, and press the new Apple
CarPlay® icon that replaces your “Phone” icon
on the main menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay®.
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the Home button
within Apple CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which
recognizes natural voice commands to use a list
of your iPhone’s® features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps — If Equipped
Additional Apps — If Equipped
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
MULTIMEDIA 231
ANDROID AUTO™ AND APPLE
C
ARPLAY® TIPS AND TRICKS
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic
Bluetooth® Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple
CarPlay® for the first time and undergoing the
setup procedure, the smartphone pairs to the
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any
setup required every time it is within range, if
Bluetooth® is turned on.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while
Android Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth®
connections to function. The connected device
is unavailable to other devices when connected
using Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect
System — If Equipped
It is possible to have multiple devices connected
to the Uconnect system. For example, if using
Android Auto™/Apple CarPlay®, the connected
device will be used to place hands-free phone
calls or send hands-free text messages. However,
another device can also be paired to the
Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio
source, so the passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be
launched from the front and center console
USB ports only.
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — IF
EQUIPPED
IS MY VEHICLE CONNECTED ?
Vehicles with an Assist and an SOS button are
connected vehicles. These buttons will be
located on either the rearview mirror or
overhead console, depending on the vehicle.
If these buttons are present in your vehicle,
you have a connected radio and can take
advantage of the many connected vehicle
features.
For further information about the ASSIST and
SOS buttons Ú page 327.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 MULTIMEDIA
INTRODUCTION TO CONNECTED VEHICLE
S
ERVICES
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s
Uconnect system is that you can now take
advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
vehicle services. To unlock the full potential of
SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first
need to activate SiriusXM Guardian™ services.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection,
transmission and use of data from your vehicle
Ú page 257.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information
And Business Hours
SiriusXM Guardian™/Care
US residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html or call
1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit:
https://www.siri-
usxm.ca/guardian-v1/
or call 1-877-324-9091
Uconnect Phone Customer Support
UconnectPhone.com or for US residents call:
1-877-855-8400.
Canadian residents call: 1-800-465-2001
(English) or call: 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Business Hours
Central Time
Monday through Friday – 7:00 am to 10:00 pm
Saturday – 8:00 am to 9:00 pm
What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?
SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device
in the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle,
which receives GPS signals and communicates
with the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
center via wireless and landline
communications networks. Depending on the
type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM
Guardian™ services require an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network
compatible with your device. SiriusXM
Guardian™ is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental
United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico
and Canada.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent upon an operative telematics
device, a cellular connection, navigation map
data, and GPS satellite signal reception,
which can limit the ability to reach the
response center or reach emergency
support.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to comply may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
MULTIMEDIA 233
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas.
Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM
Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service
delivery are hills, structures, buildings,
tunnels, weather, damage to the electrical
system or other important parts of your
vehicle, network congestion, civil distur-
bances, actions of third parties or the govern-
ment, Internet failure, and/or the physical
location of your vehicle, such as in an under-
ground parking structure or under a bridge.
Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are
available for all models.
SiriusXM Guardian™ provides:
The ability to remotely lock/unlock and
remote start your vehicle from virtually
anywhere by using the Uconnect App or your
computer.
Send & Go capability with the Uconnect App.
Use the Uconnect App to easily search, map
and send your locations directly to your Ucon-
nect Navigation.
The ability to locate your vehicle, when you
forget where you parked, using the Vehicle
Finder function of the Uconnect App.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use Uconnect system and SiriusXM
Guardian™ services.
The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your
Rearview Mirror Or Overhead Console
The ASSIST Button is used for contacting
Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect
Care, and SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
The SOS Call button connects you directly to
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care for
assistance in an emergency.
Activation
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian™ in your vehicle, you must activate
your SiriusXM Guardian™ services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your
list of apps.
3. For customer in the United States, select
“Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent who will
activate services in your vehicle, or select
“Enter Email” to activate on the web.
For customer in Canada, enter your email
address to activate services in your vehicle.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included
trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian™
services starting on the date of vehicle
purchase. To get started with your trial,
enrollment in SiriusXM Guardian™ is required.
The Uconnect 4C/4C NAV includes a trial* of
SiriusXM Guardian™ services from your date of
purchase.
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 MULTIMEDIA
Features And Packages
After the trial period, you must purchase a
subscription to continue your services by calling
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
GETTING STARTED WITH CONNECTED
V
EHICLE SERVICES
Download The Uconnect App
Once you have activated your services, you’re
only a few steps away from using connected
services.
Uconnect Mobile App
Download the Uconnect app to your mobile
device.
Use your Owner Account login and password
to open the app and then set up a PIN.
For customers in the United States, visit
https://www.mopar.com/en-us.html, and
click the Sign In/Register button in the upper
right hand corner to register your account
online.
a. Click the Register button
b. Select the correct country and email
address then click “Register”.
c. You will then receive an email notification
to confirm/verify your newly created
account.
1 — Settings
2 — Vehicle Info
3 — Remote Commands
4 — Location And Send & Go
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
MULTIMEDIA 235
d. After clicking the email link, it will take
you to a website and prompt you to
assign your account with a password.
e. Once you have added a password, the
website will direct you to your homepage
where you can add in your vehicle’s VIN.
a. Click the Register button
b. Select the correct country and email
address then click “Register”.
c. You will then receive an email notification
to confirm/verify your newly created
account.
d. After clicking the email link, it will take
you to a website and prompt you to
assign your account with a password.
e. Once you have added a password, the
website will direct you to your homepage
where you can add in your vehicle’s VIN.
For customers in Canada, register your
account via your vehicle.
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom
menu bar.
b. Press the Activate Services button from
the apps list.
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confir-
mation email will be sent to the provided
email address.
d. Press Continue Activation from the confir-
mation email. It may take a short time
before remote services will be available,
but you will be able to log into the
Uconnect App and the owner’s site.
Once on the Remote screen and you have
set-up your four-digit PIN, you can begin using
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle
Start, and activate your horn and lights
remotely, if equipped.
Press the Location button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to your
Uconnect Navigation, if equipped.
Press the Settings side menu in the upper left
corner of the app to bring up app settings and
access the Assist Call Centers.
Using Your Owner’s Site
Your Owner’s Site website https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents), or
www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) provides
you with all the information you need, all in one
place. You can track your service history, find
recommended accessories for your vehicle,
watch videos about your vehicle's features, and
easily access your manuals. It is also where you
can manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account.
This section will familiarize you with the key
elements of the website that will help you get
the most of your SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
For customers in the United States, press the
Sign In/Register button and enter your email
address and password.
For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle
button. Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle
Health Report”, or “Recalls”. The website will
then prompt you to log-in using your email
address and password.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 MULTIMEDIA
Edit/Edit Profile:
To manage the details of your SiriusXM
Guardian™ account, such as your contact
information, password and SiriusXM
Guardian™ PIN, click on the Edit/Edit Profile
button to access the details of your account.
Connected Services Status:
This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
Guardian™-equipped vehicle.
Remote Commands:
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscription, press one of these
icons and enter your four-digit SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN to remotely start
(if equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the
horn and flash the lights.
Editing Your Notifications
Notifications are an important element of your
SiriusXM Guardian™ account. For example, any
time you use your remote services (such as
Remote Door Unlock), you can elect to receive a
text message, push notification, and/or E-mail
to notify you of the event. To set up the
notifications, please follow these instructions.
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at
https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents)
and select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca
(Canadian Residents), select “My Vehicle”
and then “Dashboard”.
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button.
3. Once there, select SiriusXM Guardian™
where can edit Notification Preferences.
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email
address to notify you, and you can
customize the types of messages.
USING SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™
SOS Call
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A
Button
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
onboard assistance features located on the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed
to enhance your driving experience if you should
ever need assistance or support.
WARNING!
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ services,
including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance
Call will NOT work without a network
connection compatible with your device.
Center Light Status Description
Off No call activated
Green Active call in progress
Red System error
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
MULTIMEDIA 237
Description
SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact
with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
in the event of an emergency. When the
connection between the vehicle and the live
agent is made, your vehicle will automatically
transmit location information. In the event of a
minor collision, medical or any other emergency,
press the SOS button to be connected to a call
center agent who can send emergency
assistance to your vehicle’s location.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are depen-
dent on an operational Uconnect system, cellular
network availability that is compatible with the
device in your vehicle, and GPS network avail-
ability. Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™
are available everywhere at all times, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas.
How It Works
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator
light will turn green indicating a call has
been placed.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is accidentally
pushed, there is a 10-second delay before
the SOS call is placed. The system will
verbally alert you that a call is about to be
made. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
push the SOS Call button on the rearview
mirror or press the Cancel button on the
touchscreen within 10 seconds.
During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth®
paired phone is disconnected so
incoming or outgoing calls will go through
your mobile device versus the hands-free
system which is not available due to the
SOS Call.
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent is
made, the agent will stay on the line with you.
NOTE:
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center may
be recorded or monitored for quality assurance
purposes. Through your enrollment in and use
of the SiriusXM Guardian™ services, you
consent to being recorded.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US
and that travel into Mexico and Canada may
have limited services. In particular, responses
to SOS calls or other emergency services may
be unavailable or very limited. Vehicles
purchased outside the United States and
Canada are unable to receive SiriusXM
Guardian™ services.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected:
The light will continuously be illuminated red.
The screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please
contact your dealer.”
An in-vehicle audio message will state
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please
contact your dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop SOS Call system operation.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 MULTIMEDIA
(Continued)
(Continued)
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition key is in OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not
intact.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware is damaged during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) coverage
and/or GPS signals are unavailable or
obstructed.
Network congestion.
Weather conditions.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
If your vehicle loses battery power for any
reason (including during or after an accident)
the SOS Call System, among other vehicle
systems, will not operate.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold
in the US or Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ system. Vehicle must be
registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and
have an active subscription that includes the
applicable feature.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or
ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func-
tioning electrical system.
WARNING!
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call.
Do not add any aftermarket electrical equip-
ment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interfer-
ence that can cause the SOS Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g.,
two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder,
etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or
modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR
VEHICLE LOSES POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT),
NEITHER THE UCONNECT APPS NOR THE SIRI-
USXM GUARDIAN™ SERVICES WILL OPERATE.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any part
of the air bag system is detected. If the Air
Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag
system may not be working properly and the
SOS Call system may not be able to send a
signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care center. If the Air Bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service your vehicle immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
MULTIMEDIA 239
Remote Commands
On the Remote Commands screen, you have
access to several vehicle features that can be
controlled remotely from your mobile device.
These features include locking/unlocking,
remote starting, and activating the horn and
lights of the vehicle.
Remote Commands
Remote Commands lets you send a request to
your vehicle in one of three ways:
Anywhere using your mobile device and
Uconnect App
From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not
available on all functions)
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care (not available on all functions)
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services if
needed. If the Rearview Mirror Light is illu-
minated, have an authorized dealer service
the SOS Call system immediately.
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from a SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a
safe location.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regular inspection of your vehicle may
result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Lock
Press this button to lock
your vehicle.
2 — Unlock
Press this button to unlock
your vehicle.
3 — Vehicle Start
Press this button to start
your vehicle.
4 — Cancel
Vehicle Start
Press this button to cancel
remote start.
5 — Horn &
Lights
Press this button to sound
the horn and activate your
lights.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 MULTIMEDIA
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile
Device And The Uconnect App
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon
on your mobile device.
2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is
the same four-digit code established when
you activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN on the keypad.
3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the
command to go through to your vehicle.
4. A message will let you know if the command
was received by your vehicle.
Using A Remote Command Through Your
Owner’s Site
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the
username and password you used when
activating your SiriusXM Guardian™
services in your vehicle.
NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links
are provided on the website to help you retrieve
them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle
registered into your Owner’s Site, select the
vehicle you want to send the command to by
clicking on its image along the top.
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote
commands. Press the desired icon to
activate that feature.
4. You will then be asked to enter your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is
the same four-digit code established when
you activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Please enter your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let
you know if the command was received by
your vehicle.
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
(for example, in case of an accidental lock-out):
1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care if you are unable to lock your vehicle
through the Uconnect App or your key fob.
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent will verify
your identity by asking for your four-digit
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN, you can ask them to perform a
remote command.
NOTE:
Anyone with access to your PIN may request
Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsi-
bility to protect your PIN appropriately.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Description
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides
you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your
vehicle without the keys and from virtually any
distance.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or
Wi-Fi connection.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
MULTIMEDIA 241
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
If using the Uconnect App to command your
vehicle, your device must be compatible and
be connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
An ignition cycle is required for some remote
commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start
and Remote Door Lock/Unlock if following a
Remote Horn & Lights activation.
Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will
not be processed if the vehicle is in motion,
the ignition key is on or during an emergency
call.
NOTE:
All other remote services should be performed
via your Owner’s Site or through the Uconnect
App on your compatible device.
Remote Vehicle Start
Description
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you
with the ability to start the engine on your
vehicle without the keys and from virtually any
distance. Once started, the preset climate
controls in your vehicle can warm up or cool
down the interior.
You can also send a command to turn off an
engine that has been started using Remote
Vehicle Start. After 15 minutes, if you have not
entered your vehicle with the key, the engine
will shut off automatically.
This remote function requires your vehicle to be
equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start
system.
You can set up push notifications every time a
command is sent to activate or cancel Remote
Start.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
The vehicle has been started with the key fob
within the last 14 days.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle’s security system has been
armed and not triggered since the last
vehicle start.
The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are closed.
The vehicle’s check engine light must be off.
The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank
of fuel, along with oil and battery power.
The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.
If equipped, the vehicle must have an auto-
matic transmission.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or
Wi-Fi connection.
If the Panic button has been pressed, the
vehicle must be started at least once after
alarming the system.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents
are not authorized for Remote Vehicle Start
services. Contact the Uconnect Care Team for
assistance
Remote Horn & Lights
Description
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded
or noisy parking area by activating the horn and
lights. It may also help if you need to draw
attention to your vehicle for any reason.
If you want, you can set up push notifications
every time a command is sent to turn on the
horn and lights.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or
Wi-Fi connection.
NOTE:
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed
to be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind
the surroundings when using this feature. You
are responsible for compliance with local laws,
rules and ordinances in the location of your
vehicle when using Remote Horn & Lights.
Roadside Assistance Call
Description
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
system feature will contain an ASSIST button in
the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM Guardian™
services have been activated, the ASSIST button
can connect you directly to customer care call
centers. You will be directed to one of the four
services below.
Roadside Assist — If you get a flat tire or need
a tow, you’ll be connected to someone who
can help anytime.
Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care call center to acti-
vate your services, renew after your trial has
expired, and for in-vehicle support for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ system or help
answering any general questions
surrounding your connected services.
Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all
non-connected Uconnect system features,
such as radio and Bluetooth® connections.
Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle.
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
onboard assistance features located on the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed
to enhance your driving experience if you should
ever need assistance or support.
How It Works
Simply press the ASSIST button in the vehicle
and you will be presented with your ASSIST
options on the touchscreen. Make your
selection by pressing the touchscreen.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold
in the US and Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
MULTIMEDIA 243
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or
ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func-
tioning electrical system.
Disclaimers
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your
vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any
additional roadside assistance service costs
that you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM
Guardian™ services to you, we may record and
monitor your conversations with Roadside
Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care, whether
such conversations are initiated through the
SiriusXM Guardian™ services in your vehicle, or
via a landline or mobile device, and may share
information obtained through such recording
and monitoring in accordance with regulatory
requirements. You acknowledge, agree and
consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing
of information obtained through any such call
recordings.
Send & Go
Description
The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect App
allows you to search for a destination on your
mobile device, and then send the route to your
vehicle’s navigation system.
Vehicle Finder
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 MULTIMEDIA
Send & Go Input
How It Works
1. Use the Uconnect App to find the destination.
There are multiple ways to find a destina-
tion. After selecting the “Location” tab at
the bottom of the App, press the search box
to browse through one of the categories pro-
vided, or type the name or keyword in the
search box at the top of the App. You can
also select categories such as Favorites or
Contact List.
2. Select your destination from the list that
appears. Location information will then be
displayed on the map.
From this screen, you will be able to:
View the location on a map.
See the distance from your current location.
Send the address by selecting “Send to
Vehicle” from the mobile app.
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect
Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call
the destination by pressing the Call button.
4. Confirm your destination inside your vehicle by
pressing the Send To Vehicle option on the
pop-up that appears on the radio touchscreen.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system and a Uconnect 4C or Ucon-
nect 4C NAV unit.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Connected Service Indicators
1 — Activate Services (Connected Services)
2 — Navigation Button
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
MULTIMEDIA 245
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
LTE Network Connection
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle Finder
Description
The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect App
allows you to find the location of your stationary
vehicle.
You can also sound the horn and flash the lights
to make finding your vehicle even easier.
How It Works
Use the Uconnect App to find the location of
your vehicle.
1. Select the “Location” tab at the bottom of
the App. Then, touch the Vehicle icon to
find your vehicle.
2. Choose how you want to view the
information by pressing the layers button.
These options will appear:
Vehicle Finder Layers
1 — Map View
2 — Satellite View
3 — Hybrid View
4 — Show Traffic
5 — View Boundaries
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 MULTIMEDIA
3. You can also select the “Person” icon to see
your location.
4. Once the vehicle has been located, you can
map a route to your vehicle.
NOTE:
You are responsible for using remote
services that sound horn and flash lights
in accordance with the laws, rules and
ordinances in effect at the location of
your vehicle.
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent on a properly installed and
operational Uconnect system, cellular
network availability that is compatible
with the device in your vehicle, and GPS
network availability. Not all features of
SiriusXM Guardian™ are available every-
where at all times, particularly in remote
or enclosed areas.
Requirements
Vehicle Finder will not work while vehicle is in
motion.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle ignition must have been turned on
within 14 days.
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
Description
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that
connects your device to an LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network that is ready to go wherever
you are. After you've made your purchase, turn
on your device’s Wi-Fi and connect your devices.
Enables all your passengers to be simultane-
ously connected to the web.
Connect several devices at one time.
Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop
or any other portable-enabled media — can
connect over your private in-vehicle network.
A high-speed, secured connection lets
anyone on your private network access the
Web — great for working and relaxing.
WARNING!
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi
Hotspot while driving the vehicle as doing so
may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
MULTIMEDIA 247
Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your
Vehicle
How It Works
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides
the vehicle passengers with an
internet access hotspot in the vehicle, using the
radio as an access point. The hotspot will allow
Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle devices (such as a
laptop or any other portable-enabled media
device) to wirelessly connect to the internet.
Uconnect offers a complimentary 3-month trial
period that includes 1GB of total data. The trial
can be activated any time within the first year of
new vehicle ownership.
Use one of these three ways to purchase a
subscription to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select
the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the
How To Purchase button and follow the
instructions.
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link
to the AT&T portal to get set up.
3. For existing Connected Car customers: Press
the ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T
Customer Care agent who will assist you.
Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you
can change its name and the password by
selecting the Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing
the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot button. You can also
view the connected devices from the app
screen by pressing the View Connected Devices
button.
NOTE:
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not
required in order to purchase and use the 4G
Wi-Fi Hotspot.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Description
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent may be able to locate the
stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to
help recover it.
How It Works
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
enforcement as soon as possible. They will
work with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care that your vehicle has been stolen.
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
Agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report
number (as issued by your local law enforce-
ment). If you have downloaded the Ucon-
nect App, you can push the “Settings” menu
button on your device, select “Help”, and
then select “SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care” to make the call.
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
authenticate that you are the owner of the
vehicle and contact the law enforcement
with whom you filed the stolen vehicle
report.
WARNING!
Always drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel and obey all applicable laws.
You have full responsibility and assume all
risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications in this vehicle when
it is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result
in an accident involving in serious injury or
death.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 MULTIMEDIA
4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
work with your local law enforcement to
locate the vehicle. You will be contacted
by law enforcement if your vehicle is
recovered. While the investigation is
ongoing, you should also contact your
insurance company to inform it of the
situation.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
NOTE:
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas.
Monthly Vehicle Health Report
Description
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect
service through which a summary of the
performance of your vehicle’s key systems will be
sent to you every month so you can stay on top
of your vehicle’s maintenance needs. This is
provided as a convenience to you and does not
substitute for regular maintenance to your
vehicle.
In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health
Report, the Uconnect system in your vehicle
may collect and transmit vehicle data to
SiriusXM Guardian™ and to FCA, such as your
vehicle’s health and performance, your
vehicle’s location, your utilization of the
features in your vehicle, and other data.
This data collection and transmission begins
when you enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will
continue even if you cancel your SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscription unless you call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care and tell
them to deactivate your Uconnect Services.
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy
for more information, located at
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/
privacy
(US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents).
For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™
private policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/
privacy-policy.
Vehicle Health Alert
Description
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it
senses a problem with one of your vehicle’s key
systems. For further information, go to your
Owner’s website.
NOTE:
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to
register and activate services. During this
process you will be asked to provide an email
address to which the reports will be sent.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
MULTIMEDIA 249
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you notifications to
remind you when services are needed, or
to alert you of other important information,
such as recall notices. When you receive a
notification through your touchscreen, press OK
to dismiss the message, or press Call Care to
speak with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent.
NOTE:
Pressing OK or the X button on the pop-up
screen will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the
In-Vehicle Messages mailbox will display. In the
Mailbox, you can reopen messages or delete
messages.
Amazon Alexa® Skill — If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to
command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa®!
With Amazon Alexa®, you can connect to your
vehicle and remotely access key services and
features.
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect
Navigation, you can send a destination directly
to your vehicle using Alexa®.
If you need assistance, you can always ask
Alexa® for help, or complete a list of commands
by saying: “Alexa®, ask <brand name> for help
with my car.”
Here are a few of the many questions you can
ask Alexa®:
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to start my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to send
1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan
to my <vehicle name>.”
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel
level of my <vehicle name>.”
An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is
required. To use Amazon Alexa®, first, register
for SiriusXM Guardian™ Ú page 233.
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle
to Amazon Alexa®:
1. Download the Amazon Alexa® app on your
mobile device (Apple® or Android™).
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to
SKILLS.
3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap
Enable.
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle
brand> Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
6. Log in using your Owner Account
credentials. This will be the same user
name and password you used when
registering for SiriusXM Guardian
Connected Services.
7. CONFIRM account to return to the <vehicle
brand> Skill.
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand>
Skill on Alexa®!
Google Assistant — If Equipped
With the Google Assistant, you can get help and
keep tabs on your car. The Assistant is available
across your devices, including Android™ phones,
iPhone® devices, or voice-activated speakers,
like Google Home. If you need assistance, ask
Google for help, or for a complete list of
commands by saying: “Hey Google, ask <brand
name> for help with my car.”
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 MULTIMEDIA
Here are a few examples of commands:
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to start my
<vehicle name> with pin XXXX.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to send
1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan
to my <vehicle name>.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> what is the
fuel level of my <vehicle name>”
To link your Uconnect account with Google
Assistant, follow these steps:
1. Download and install the Google Assistant
app on your smart phone from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. After installation, log in to the Google
Assistant app with your Gmail ID. Verify your
account by pressing the icon in the upper
right hand corner.
3. Press the Discover button in the bottom left
corner of the screen. Enter the vehicle
brand name.
4. A prompt will appear to link your Uconnect
account. Press “Link Uconnect to Google”.
5. Press “Sign In” and enter the email address
and password you created when you
activated Uconnect services.
6. Lastly, press “Authorize” to complete the
linking process.
Now, you can ask Google Assistant to help you:
Remotely start the engine, or cancel a
remote start
Send a destination to their vehicle’s built-in
Uconnect Navigation system
Monitor vehicle vitals, such as tire press, fuel
level and oil life
And more!
Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
Description
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving
and give you peace of mind when your loved
ones are out on the road. You can set boundary
limits, monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your
vehicle’s location any time, any place. Use the
Uconnect app to set alerts:
Boundary Alert
Receive a notification the moment your
vehicle is driven either out of or into a
geographic boundary that you set.
Curfew Alert
Receive a notification when your car is being
driven outside of the curfew time.
Speed Alert
Receive a notification whenever your car
exceeds a speed limit you set.
Valet Alert
Receive a notification if and when your
vehicle is driven outside a quarter-mile
radius of a valet drop-off zone.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
MULTIMEDIA 251
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
Description
SmartWatch Integration puts the Uconnect app
right on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear.
To get started, follow these steps:
1. Download the Uconnect app from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone
using the username and password you
created when you first set up your account.
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
connected through Bluetooth®.
4. The Uconnect app should appear on your
SmartWatch.
Once the app is downloaded on your
SmartWatch, you can enjoy these features:
Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the
remote lock button in the app and entering
your security PIN.
Remote start or stop your vehicle.
View important vehicle stats, such as fuel
level, vehicle location, tire pressure warning,
and more.
For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube
channel for SmartWatch Integration.
Uconnect Market
With Uconnect Market, you can enjoy seamless
and secure transactions from the comfort of
your vehicle. Make restaurant reservations,
place food orders, or pay for other goods and
services right from the vehicle’s touchscreen.
To get started with Uconnect Market on the
touchscreen:
1. Press the Market button in the Uconnect
App drawer.
2. Press “Get Started”.
3. Press “Text Me A Link” and enter your
phone number to receive a text message
with instructions on how to set up Uconnect
Market.
NOTE:
If the text message does not come through,
press the Resend Text button. It might take a
minute to receive the text message.
4. Once you receive the text message, press
the link provided. You will be directed to a
Sign-in screen. Enter your email and
password. You will now be able to use
Uconnect Market.
5. If you do not have an account, press
“Register Now to create one.
6. Accept the Uconnect market Terms of
Service.
7. Enter your credit card information, and
press “next”.
8. Enter your phone number, and press “Next”.
9. The system will verifying the phone number.
Once verified, Uconnect Market will be
available to use. Press the OK button.
From the online portal,
https://
market.mopar.com/home
, you can link loyalty
accounts and start receiving benefits from them
while still using Uconnect Market and view your
purchase history.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 MULTIMEDIA
MANAGE MY SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN ™
A
CCOUNT
To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account,
press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
NOTE:
It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or
turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM Guardian™
Care to remove your personal data.
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
For additional information about SiriusXM
Guardian™, active subscribers can push the
ASSIST button and then select SiriusXM
Guardian™ Call on your in-vehicle touchscreen
to contact SiriusXM Guardian™. Your call will be
directed to a SiriusXM Guardian™ agent or held
in a queue until an agent is available. If you
do not have an active subscription, push the
ASSIST button and click the Activate button on
the touchscreen to activate services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS
1.
What happens if I accidentally push the
SOS Call button on the mirror?
You have
10 seconds after pushing the SOS Call
button to cancel the call. To cancel the call,
either push the SOS Call button again, or
press the Cancel button on the in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. What type of information is sent when I use
the SOS Call button from my vehicle?
Certain vehicle information, such as make
and model, is transmitted along with the
last known GPS location.
3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You
can use the SOS Call button to make a call
if you or someone else needs emergency
assistance.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE DOOR
L
OCK/UNLOCK FAQS
1.
How long does it take to unlock or lock the
door?
Depending on various conditions, it
can take up to three minutes or more for
the request to get to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door
more quickly, however its range is limited
and your Uconnect App comes in handy for
these and other situations.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device?
People sometimes lose their mobile
devices, which is why security measures
have been engineered into the Uconnect
App. Asking for your username, password
and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN are
required for the activation of Remote
services through your mobile device.
It is your responsibility to protect your
passwords and PINs.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App is
compatible with most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allow us to
remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
MULTIMEDIA 253
5. Why is the Uconnect App running slow?
The Uconnect App relies on a mobile
network connection from your device to
send commands to your vehicle which must
have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G,
4G (data), or 5G (data) network connection.
If either your device or your vehicle is in an
area with below average coverage, it may
take longer to log in and send commands.
CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS
1.
What is the phone number for roadside
assistance call? The phone number is:
US: 1-800-521-2779
Canada: 1-800-363-4869
2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™,
does it cover towing or other expenses
incurred by using roadside assistance?
No, however your new vehicle may include
Roadside Assistance Call services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & GO
FAQ
S
1.
How long does it take to send the route and
destination to my vehicle?
Depending on
various conditions, it can take up to
three minutes for the request to get
through to your vehicle.
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle?
Yes, once you enter your vehicle, and start
the engine, the pop-up message stating that
you have a new route will appear. There is
an exit button on the pop-up that will cancel
the route if selected.
3. Can I select a different route than the most
recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once
you enter the vehicle, and start the engine,
the pop-up message offers a “Locations”
option. Once “Locations” is selected, you
can choose from a list of recently sent
destinations.
CONNECTED SERVICES VEHICLE FINDER
FAQ
S
1.
Can someone else locate my vehicle?
Your
vehicle may be located by anyone who has
your PIN and access to your account. It is
your responsibility to guard your PIN
accordingly. See the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian™ terms of service for
more information.
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights? Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or
more for the request to get through to your
vehicle.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I
turn them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off
the horn and lights by pressing the red
Panic button. Depending on your vehicle,
the horn will turn off after 29 seconds,
5 seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles
if the trigger remains active, and then the
vehicle security system will rearm itself.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED SERVICES STOLEN VEHICLE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS
1.
Can someone locate my vehicle?
To
enhance your privacy, and the privacy of
others using your vehicle, a stolen vehicle
police report is required for you to activate
this service. You must involve local law
enforcement to have SiriusXM Guardian™
locate your vehicle. We may also locate the
vehicle for other law enforcement or
government agencies, subject to a valid
court order telling SiriusXM Guardian™ to
do so. We will also provide the service for
FCA entities to locate a vehicle that you
have purchased through them.
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered?
After you provide the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent with the stolen vehicle
report, the agent will work together with law
enforcement to try to locate your vehicle.
If your vehicle is recovered, you will be
contacted by law enforcement.
3. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my
insurance rates? Some insurance providers
offer lower rates on vehicles equipped with
systems that can deter auto theft. When
shopping for insurance, be sure to inform
the insurance provider of your SiriusXM
Guardian™ services subscription to find out
if the insurance provider can offer you a
lower rate.
NOTE:
Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance
companies, and SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an
insurance product. You are responsible for
obtaining insurance coverage for your vehicle
and yourself.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE
S
TART FAQS
1.
How long does it take to remotely start my
vehicle?
Depending on various conditions,
it can take three minutes or more for the
request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will remote start your
vehicle more quickly. However its range is
limited. For example, when you are leaving
the stadium after the game, you can use the
Uconnect App to remote start your vehicle
and have the inside of your vehicle
comfortable by the time you get to it.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless
device? People sometimes lose their
wireless devices, which is why security
measures have been engineered into the
Uconnect App. Asking for your username,
password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security
PIN help to ensure that nobody can start
your vehicle if they happen to find your
device.
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle
using the App? No. Driving your vehicle
still requires the keys to be in the vehicle.
The Remote Start feature simply starts the
engine to warm up or cool down the interior
before you arrive.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
MULTIMEDIA 255
5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with
the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command?
No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel
Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop
the vehicle.
6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been
designed to work on most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allow us to
remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE
H
ORN & LIGHTS FAQS
1.
How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights?
Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or
more for the request to get through to your
vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will sound the horn and
flash the lights quicker; however its range is
limited.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I
turn them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off
the horn and lights by pressing the red
Panic button. Otherwise, Remote Horn &
Lights will continue for 20 seconds.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Uconnect
App? The Uconnect App has been designed to
work on most devices with the Apple® and
Android™ operating systems. The capabilities of
these devices allow us to remotely command
your vehicle. Other operating systems may be
supported in the future.
CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT FAQS
1.
How do I register for my SiriusXM
Guardian™ account? There are three ways
that you can register your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Account:
Push the Assist button. A call will be
placed to an agent who can assist in
registering your new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the
Apps menu. Select the button to speak
with an agent, who can assist in regis-
tering your new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the
Apps menu. Enter your email on the
touchscreen and then follow the prompts
from the provided email. You will receive
an email with an activation link that will
be good for 72 hours. Once you click the
activation link, you will be prompted to fill
out your information and accept Terms
and Conditions. Then, you will be directed
to the SiriusXM Guardian™ home page to
complete your profile and demo the
remote services.
2. Why do I need an email address? Without
an email address, customers cannot
register for SiriusXM Guardian™. Customers
need to register so they can subscribe to
receive additional services and create a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN for
remote command requests.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 MULTIMEDIA
3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™
security PIN? Set up your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN during the
registration process. The SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN will be required to
authenticate you when accessing your
account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or
performing any remote services, such as
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn &
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.
4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™
security PIN? If you’ve already activated
services and forgot your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN, you can reset the PIN by
selecting Edit Profile on your Owner’s Site.
5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
payment account address? Your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account address can
be updated online, or by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in
your vehicle. To update online: login to your
Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile >
SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account.
6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
profile? Your name, home address, phone
number, email address and SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN can be updated
online on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your
Owner’s Site then select Edit Profile to edit
your personal information. Make your edits
and click Save.
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy
them? Your new vehicle purchase may have
come with an included trial period for
certain Apps and services.
8. Can I access every App and service while
driving? No, some applications and services
are not available while driving. For your own
safety, it is not possible to use some of the
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in
motion (e.g. key pad).
9. What happens when my subscription
comes up for renewal? If you have added a
credit card to your account information,
your subscription will be automatically
renewed for a term length in accordance
with the service plan that you have selected
at the then current subscription rate and on
every renewal date thereafter, unless you
cancel your subscription by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Care. If you have not added a
credit card to your account, SiriusXM
Guardian™ will send you an email or letter
in advance of your expiration date to remind
you that your subscription is ending soon.
10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™
notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care, or go to your
Owner’s Site and then update your
preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™
customer web portal.
11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by
pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview
mirror.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
MULTIMEDIA 257
12. How do I update my credit card
information? Login to your Owner’s Site,
and select Edit Profile, then select SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account.
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on
my subscription? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care.
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and
choose a subscription to view its expiration
date. When your subscription is about to ex-
pire, you will receive an email or letter of no-
tification.
14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire
subscription? Prorated refunds are provided
from the date of cancellation for annual
plans or longer. Please see the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian™ Terms & Conditions for
refunds related to billing plans of other
lengths and other circumstances.
15. Can I cancel a subscription before it
expires? Yes. If you have an annual
subscription, your subscription will be
canceled the day you cancel. If you have a
monthly subscription, your subscription will
be canceled on the last day of the month in
which you choose to cancel.
16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle?
Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner,
you’ll want to remove your account
information. This process removes all
personal information, returns the Uconnect
system to its original factory settings,
removes all SiriusXM Guardian™ services
and account information. To remove your
account information from the Uconnect
system, contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care.
17. What if I forgot to remove my account
information before I returned my lease
vehicle or sold it? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care.
18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/
data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network
connection compatible with my device is
temporarily unavailable? The SOS Call and
ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are
not connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G, 4G (data), 5G (data) network.
Services that required your smartphone
only direct calls to Roadside Assistance Call
may be functioning if you have an operable
network.
DATA COLLECTION & PRIVACY
The Uconnect system collects and transmits data
which may include information about your vehicle,
your vehicle’s health and performance, your
vehicle’s location, your utilization of the features in
your vehicle, and other data. The collection, use and
sharing of this information is required to provide the
SiriusXM Guardian™ services and is further
described by the Uconnect Privacy Policy, which
can be found at
www.driveuconnect.com/
connectedservices/privacy
(US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents).
This information may be collected by SiriusXM®
Connected Vehicle Services Inc. and shared with
FCA US LLC for the purposes stated in the Uconnect
Privacy Policy. Vehicle health and diagnostic
information including location data may be used by
Uconnect to provide a Vehicle Health Report to you.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 MULTIMEDIA
Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™
subscription, this vehicle diagnostic health
information, including location data, may still be
transmitted from your vehicle and you may still
have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
Use of any of the Uconnect Services including
SiriusXM Guardian™ is deemed to be your
consent to the collection, use and disclosure
of this information in accordance with the
Uconnect Privacy Policy. If you do not want this
information to be collected, used, or shared,
you must cancel your Uconnect services in their
entirety by contacting us as referenced in the
Uconnect Privacy Policy.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road
Pages, which displays vehicle information
related to the drivetrain, transfer case, and
coolant/oil gauges.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps
button on the touchscreen, and then select
“Off-Road Pages”.
Main Menu
Off-Road Pages has the following selectable
pages:
Vehicle Dynamics
Pitch & Roll — If Equipped
Accessory Gauge
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along
the bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present
in each of the five selectable page options. It
provides continually updating information for
the following items:
1. Current Transfer Case Status (only appears
when in 4WD Low)
2. Current Latitude/Longitude
3. Current Altitude of the vehicle
4. Status of Hill Descent
1 — Uconnect Apps Button
2 — Off-Road Pages App
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
MULTIMEDIA 259
DRIVETRAIN
The Drivetrain page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
1. Steering angle in degrees
2. Power Transfer Unit
Drivetrain
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s
current pitch (angle up and down) and roll
(angle side to side) in degrees. The pitch and roll
gauges provide a visualization of the current
vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu
ACCESSORY GAUGES
The Accessory Gauges page displays the
current status of the vehicle’s Coolant
Temperature, Oil Temperature, Transmission
Temperature, and Battery Voltage.
Accessory Gauges Menu
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Power Transfer Unit
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Transmission Temperature
4 — Battery Voltage
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 MULTIMEDIA
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
The Selec-Terrain page displays the current
Selec-Terrain mode through a high resolution
image. The vehicle must be in the ON/RUN
position to display Selec-Terrain information.
The selectable modes are as follows:
Auto — Default
Snow
Sand
Mud
Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4WD LOW
NOTE:
While in the Selec-Terrain pages, the Off-Road
Pages Status Bar will also display the current
Selec-Terrain mode.
Current Selec-Terrain Mode
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may
be lessened or eliminated by relocating the
mobile phone antenna. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the
repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended
that the radio volume be turned down or off
during mobile phone operation when not using
Uconnect (if equipped).
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
MULTIMEDIA 261
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers.
The level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio. Ú page 423.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reason-
able protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guar-
antee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
a. Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
b. Consult an authorized dealer or an expe-
rienced radio technician for help.
5
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
ABS provides increased vehicle stability and
brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during
braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time
the vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are
beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice,
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop).
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires.
Modification may result in degraded ABS
performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SAFETY 263
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE (ABS) W ARNING
L
IGHT
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning
and that service is required. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to
restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the
ABS Warning Light does not come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced EBC
system. This system includes Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD),
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and
Traction Control System (TCS). These systems
work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), Hill Descent
Control (HDC), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Ready
Alert Braking (RAB), and Selec-Speed Control
(SSC), and Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and amount
of brake application and then applies optimum
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the
brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefit of the system,
you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence (do not “pump”
the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired.
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on
he vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS
cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SAFETY
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the Brake
System Warning Light does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) and the Electric Power Steering
(EPS) modules, that provides torque at the
steering wheel for certain driving conditions, in
which the ESC module is detecting vehicle
instability. The torque that the steering wheel
receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/
maintain vehicle stability. The only notification
the driver receives that the feature is active is
the torque applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through
small torques on the steering wheel, which
means the effectiveness of the DST feature is
highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and
overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
important to realize that this feature will not
steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still
responsible for steering the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear axles
by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle.
This is done to prevent overslip of the rear
wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before
the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel
angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of
wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions,
leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped) Ú page 265.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur.
ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs,
especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles.
The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SAFETY 265
(Continued)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability
of the vehicle under various driving conditions.
ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the
appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the above
conditions. Engine power may also be reduced
to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to
flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner which could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SAFETY
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the ESC OFF switch and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes,
the push and release of the button will toggle
the ESC modes. Multiple attempts may be
required to return to ESC On.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only and should not be used on any
public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC
features are turned off. To enter the “Full Off”
mode, push and hold the ESC OFF switch for five
seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running. After five seconds, a chime
will sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
illuminate, and the ESC OFF message will
display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to
“Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a
predetermined speed. When the vehicle speed
slows below the predetermined speed the
system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive
modes (if equipped).
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-
tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section), has
been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SAFETY 267
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode.
It should turn off with the engine running. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction
and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins
to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
that the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come
on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON
position, the ESC system will be on even if it
was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving
while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed
while descending hills during various driving
situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by
actively controlling the brakes.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features are
disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SAFETY
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable HDC:
Driveline is in 4WD Low
Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
The park brake is released
The driver door is closed
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate
automatically if driven down a grade of
sufficient magnitude. The set speed for HDC
is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted
by using the gear shift +/-. The following
summarizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but
will not activate.
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the
gear chosen by the transmission. When actively
controlling HDC the transmission will shift
appropriately for the driver-selected set speed
and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an
uphill grade.
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SAFETY 269
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of
the following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The park brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-
nate and remain on solid when HDC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal
operating condition for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the
driver pushes the HDC switch but enable
conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when HDC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
when HDC deactivates due to overheated
brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will
activate again once the brakes have cooled
sufficiently.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for
a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending
hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
driving conditions and is responsible for
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SAFETY
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off.
To change the current setting, proceed as
follows:
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
display Ú page 88
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings
Ú page 181
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water
buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions
when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI
speed. When RBS is active, there is no
notification to the driver and no driver
interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking
situation may occur by monitoring how fast the
throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic
Brake Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake
system for a panic stop.
Selec-Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
SSC is intended for off-road driving in 4WD Low
only. SSC maintains vehicle speed by actively
controlling engine torque and brakes.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer.
HSA is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to
other vehicles, people, and objects, and most
importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If so,
there may not be enough brake pressure to
hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill
when the brake pedal is released. In order to
avoid rolling down an incline while resuming
acceleration, manually activate the trailer
brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure
prior to releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK (P).
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
SAFETY 271
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable SSC:
Driveline is in 4WD Low
Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
The parking brake is released
The driver door is closed
Driver is not applying throttle
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate automatically
once the following conditions are met:
Driver releases throttle
Driver releases brake
Transmission is in any selection other than
PARK (P)
Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the
driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear
shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC set speed may be
reduced when climbing a grade and the level of
set speed reduction depends on the magnitude
of grade. The following summarizes the SSC set
speeds:
SSC Target Set Speeds
1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for
SSC target speed selection but will not affect
the gear chosen by the transmission. While
actively controlling SSC the transmission will
shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain
Select mode. This difference may be notable
to the driver and may be perceived as a
varying level of aggressiveness.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SAFETY
Driver Override:
The driver may override SSC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the SSC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (SSC exits immediately).
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the
SSC switch has an LED which offer feedback to
the driver about the state SSC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-
nate and remain on solid when SSC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal oper-
ating condition for SSC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the
driver pushes the SSC switch but enable
conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when SSC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to
overheated brakes.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of
each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to
the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine
power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD), functions similarly to a limited
slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle
is spinning faster than the other, the system will
apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine torque to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when driving in off road
conditions. The driver must remain attentive to
the driving conditions and is responsible for
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
SAFETY 273
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
tions Ú page 163.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — I F
E
QUIPPED
BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside
the rear bumper/fascia, to detect highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot
zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE (R) and enters standby mode when
the vehicle is in PARK (P).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.7 m). The zone length starts at the outside
mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m)
beyond the rear bumper/fascia of the vehicle.
The BSM system monitors the detection zones
on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle
speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in
these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer.
Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is
clear for both your vehicle and trailer before
making a lane change. If the trailer or other
object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)
extends beyond the side of your vehicle,
this may result in the BSM warning light
remaining illuminated the entire time the
vehicle is in a forward gear Ú page 181.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SAFETY
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of
the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps when
a motorcycle or any small object remains at
the side of the vehicle for extended periods of
time (more than a couple of seconds).
The area on the rear bumper/fascia where the
radar sensors are located must remain free of
snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that
the BSM system can function properly. Do not
block the area of the rear bumper/fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign
objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location
The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. If the turn signal is then
activated, and it corresponds to an alert present
on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at
the same time, both the visual and audio alerts
will be issued. In addition to the audible alert
the radio (if on) will also be muted.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear, front)
while driving to see if an alert is necessary.
The BSM system will issue an alert during these
types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
SAFETY 275
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle
remains in the blind spot for approximately
1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated.
If the difference in speed between the two vehicles
is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light
will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such
objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes Ú page 423.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing
out of parking spaces where their vision of
oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space
until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed.
The RCP system will then have a clear view of
the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is
detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE
(R), the driver is alerted using both the visual
and audible alarms, including reducing the
radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be blocked by vehicles parked on either side.
If the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of
operation that are available in the Uconnect
System Ú page 181.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system
is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a
backup aid system. It is intended to be used
to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle
in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be
careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury
or death.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SAFETY 277
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM
or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started the previously stored
mode will be recalled and used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW With Mitigation Operation
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a
haptic warning to warn the driver when it detects
a potential frontal collision. The warnings are
intended to provide the driver with enough time
to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver
will be provided with audible and visual warn-
ings and may provide a haptic warning in the
form of a brake jerk.
If the driver does not take action based upon
these progressive warnings, then the system
will provide a limited level of active braking to
help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-
ings by braking and the system determines that
the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake
force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 32 mph (52 km/h), the
system may provide the maximum braking possible
to mitigate the potential forward collision. If the
Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold
the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes.
FCW Message
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SAFETY
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated
Ú page 423.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
1 mph (2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system.
To prevent such misuse of the system, after
four Active Braking events within a key cycle,
the Active Braking portion of FCW will be
deactivated until the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such
as overhead objects, ground reflections,
objects not in the path of the vehicle,
stationary objects that are far away, oncoming
traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the
unavailable screens.
Turning FCW On or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect
display in the control settings Ú page 181.
To turn the FCW system on, press the forward
collision button once.
To turn the FCW system off, press the forward
collision button once.
NOTE:
When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system
to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front.
When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the
system from warning the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front. If the FCW
is set to “off”, “FCW OFF" will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”,
this prevents the system from providing
limited active braking, or additional brake
support if the driver is not braking adequately
in the event of a potential frontal collision.
When FCW status is set to “Warning and
Braking”, this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
The system will retain the last setting selected
by the driver after ignition shutdown.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SAFETY 279
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status
are programmable through the Uconnect
System Ú page 181.
Far
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Far” setting and the system status is
“Only Warning”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible more distant
collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings.
More cautious drivers that do not mind
frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
Medium
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Medium” setting and the system status
is “Only Warning”, this allows the system
to warn the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings.
Near
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Near” setting and the system status is
“Only Warning”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible closer colli-
sion with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings.
This setting provides less reaction time
than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that
want to avoid frequent warnings may
prefer this setting.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
driveable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance is
no longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see
an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster display reads:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still driveable under
normal conditions, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure based on the vehicle recommended
cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has
not been driven for at least three hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SAFETY
molded into the tire sidewall. The tire pressure
will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is
normal and there should be no adjustment for
this increased pressure.
See Ú page 395 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or
above the recommended cold placard pressure.
Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure
Monitoring Warning Light) illuminates, you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Warning Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light will turn
off once the system receives the updated tire
pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than
three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227
kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C)
will decrease the tire pressure to approximately
24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough
to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning
Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
(193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light will turn
off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value
Ú
page 423.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Warning Light off.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pres-
sures and warning have been established for
the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Unde-
sirable system operation or sensor damage
may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
for use on aftermarket wheels, and may
contribute to a poor overall system perfor-
mance. Customers are encouraged to use
Original Equipment Manufacturing (OEM)
wheels to ensure TPMS feature operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to have your sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SAFETY 281
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance, or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following
components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display
a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Service Warning
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SAFETY
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists.
If the system fault no longer exists, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer
flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can
occur due to any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching
Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching
full size does not have a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System sensor. Therefore, the
TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching
full size spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition key
cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will remain
on and a chime will sound. In addition, the
graphic in the instrument cluster will still
display a different color pressure value and
an "Inflate to XX" message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a “Service Tire Pressure System”
message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster
will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the compact spare or non-matching full
size, the TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the “TPMS Warning Light” will
turn off and the graphic in the instrument
cluster will display a new pressure value
instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SAFETY 283
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning
Light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of
the four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a "Tire Low"
message for a minimum of five seconds, an
"Inflate to XX" message and a graphic showing
the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pressure
(those in a different color in the instrument
cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value as shown in the
"Inflate to XX" message. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the pressure values
in the graphic display in the instrument cluster
will return to their original color, and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Warning Light will turn off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Warning Light off.
Tire Fill Alert
Tire Fill Alert notifies the user when the placard
tire pressure is attained while inflating or
deflating the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable
the Tire Fill Alert feature through use of the
customer settings in the radio.
NOTE:
Only one tire can be filled at a time when
using the Tire Fill Alert system.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if
an existing TPM system fault is set to “active”
or if the system is in deactivation mode
(if equipped).
The system will be activated when the system
detects an increase of tire pressure while
inflating the tire. The ignition must be in the
RUN mode, with the transmission in PARK (P).
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to
enter Tire Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
When Tire Fill Alert Mode is entered, the tire
pressure display screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SAFETY
Operation:
The horn will chirp once to let the user know
when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches
recommended pressure.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over
filled and will continue to chirp every five seconds
if the user continues to inflate the tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough
air is let out to reach proper inflation level.
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire
is then under-inflated and will continue to
chirp every five seconds if the user continues
to deflate the tire.
If the hazard lamps do not come on while
inflating the tire, the TPMS sensor may be in
an inoperative position, preventing the TPMS
sensor signal from being received. In this
case, the vehicle may need to be moved
slightly forward or backward.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all
four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
wheel and tire assemblies that do not have
TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter
wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM)
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime,
the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message and then display dashes (--) in place of
the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message in the instrument
cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the
pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the "TPM
Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will
display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
and then display pressure values in place of the
dashes. On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be
displayed as long as no system fault exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SAFETY 285
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured
in the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position. Ú page 309
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint. Ú page 309
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window.
If your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, see Ú page 420 for customer
service contact information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts.
The BeltAlert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front
of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air
bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a
rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SAFETY
(Continued)
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on the
outboard front passenger seat or when the seat
is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by
an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal conditions.
However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and
reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SAFETY 287
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
WARNING! (Continued)
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
WARNING! (Continued)
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SAFETY 289
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap
belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt.
To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SAFETY
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be
adjusted in the upward position without pushing
or squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull down-
ward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions — Fixed Rear Seat — If
Equipped
The second row center seat belt may feature a
seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle,
which allows the seat belt to detach from the
lower anchor when the seat is folded. The
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then
be stored out of the way in the left side trim panel
for added convenience to open up utilization of
the storage areas behind the front seats when
the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular
latch plate from its stowed position in the
left rear side trim panel.
Mini-Latch Stowage
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat
belt over the seat.
Shoulder Belt Routed Through The Seat Belt Guide
Loop
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instruc-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
SAFETY 291
3. Route the shoulder belt through the seat
belt guide loop on the top of the seatback
near the inboard side of the left head
restraint.
Inserting Mini-Latch Plate Into Mini-Buckle
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the mini-latch plate into the
mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”
Mini-Latch Plate Buckled
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen.
To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt
if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
seat belt in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack
in the seat belt.
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 SAFETY
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular
latch plate into the center red slot on the
mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into
its stowed position.
Detaching Mini-Latch And Buckle
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and the
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are
not properly connected when the seat belt
is used by an occupant, the seat belt will
not be able to provide proper restraint and
will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing
is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted,
follow the preceding procedure to detach
the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle,
untwist the webbing, and reattach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
When the center seat belt is in use, make
sure that any cargo in the cargo compart-
ment is properly secured and does not
contact the seat belt webbing, and that
there is no slack in the center shoulder belt
webbing.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
can increase the risk of serious injury or
death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt
Extender when the lap belt is not long
enough and only use in the recommended
seating positions. Remove and store the
Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
SAFETY 293
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury
in the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event
of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from
the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work
for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
restraint system. See
Ú
page 320 for additional
information. The figure below illustrates the locking
feature for each seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(Sliding Seat)
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SAFETY
(Continued)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(Fixed Seat)
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough
to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front
of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air
bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a
rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
SAFETY 295
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
S
YSTEMS (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with
the following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not
inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SAFETY
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect
the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 96.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted
in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a collision.
If the light does not come on as a bulb check
when the ignition is first turned on, stays on
after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
1 — Driver Front Air Bag
2 — Passenger Front Air Bag
3 — Supplemental Passenger Knee
Air Bag/Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
4 — Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag/Driver
Knee Impact Bolster
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SAFETY 297
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and type
of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC), which may receive information
from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other
system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver
and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch
that detects whether the driver or front
passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger Occupant Classification System
(“OCS”) that is designed to provide Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate
to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-
ably extending your arms to reach the steering
wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front
of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air
bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a
rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air bag
cushions are designed to open only when the
air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SAFETY
including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic
gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety
system for this vehicle. It is designed to provide
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
consists of the following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And
Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
located underneath the front passenger seat.
The Sensor is located beneath the passenger
seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will be
sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from
the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s
most probable classification. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC.
The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
based on occupant classification. In order for
the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or
has very light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
small passenger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
rear-facing child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or
his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a
period of time.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
SAFETY 299
(Continued)
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an
adult, allowing a full-power Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never
allow children to ride in the front passenger seat
and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the
front passenger seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the
seated weight on the front passenger seat
and where that weight is located. The OCS
communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to
determine whether the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 SAFETY
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback
and the seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers
(Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a
small adult, occupies the front passenger seat,
the OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This does
not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death. The OCS determines the most probable
classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
decreased or increased seated weight, which
may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision.
This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat may
result in a reduced-power deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a full-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating
include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways,
or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the
full upright position.
The front passenger carries or holds an object
while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
Objects are lodged between the front
passenger seat and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated
weight on the front passenger seat are
attached to the front passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
SAFETY 301
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the
front passenger seat is seated improperly, the
occupant may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position, your
back against the seatback, sitting upright,
facing forward, in the center of the seat, with
your feet comfortably on or near the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly
seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Placing an object on the floor under the
front passenger seat may prevent the OCS
from working properly, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision. Do not
place any objects on the floor under the
front passenger seat.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 SAFETY
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable
to classify the front passenger seat status.
A malfunction in the OCS may affect the
operation of the air bag system. If the Air Bag
Warning Light does not come on, or stays on
after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you
drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical
OCS components that may affect the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
front seat passenger, the OCS components
must function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover.
If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service
for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat
accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
Always use the correct seat cover and
cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with
an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS
related component or fastener be modified
or replaced with any part except those which
are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service proce-
dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
related components, seat cover or cushion
may inadvertently change the air bag
deployment in case of a frontal collision.
This could result in death or serious injury
to the front passenger if the vehicle is
involved in a collision. A modified vehicle
may not comply with required Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities,
contact an authorized dealer.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
SAFETY 303
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger
Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column and a
Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted
in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags
provide enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with a “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts,
in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air
Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during
impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant
protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys
the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator
of whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
SAFETY 305
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle
experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will deploy the side air bags and
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SAFETY
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold.
The abrasions are similar to friction rope
burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are
not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blis-
tering, see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor.
If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have
the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the
seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SAFETY 307
(Continued)
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will
determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(if equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the
key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks
in the engine compartment and on the ground
near the engine compartment and fuel tank
before resetting the system and starting the
engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to
the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights)
after an accident, reset the system by following
the procedure described below. If you have any
doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden-
tally or may not function properly if modifica-
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening
of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer
approved seat accessories may be used. If it
is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
SAFETY 309
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
SAFETY 311
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types
of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat.
The child and belt-positioning booster seat are
held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front
of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air
bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a
rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make
sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s
squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or
neck, move the child closer to the center of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat
belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
SAFETY 313
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren.
The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor
points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located
at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage
located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped
child seats without using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Some seating positions may have a top
tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In
these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Sliding Second Row LATCH Positions
Fixed Second Row LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
SAFETY 315
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed
by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages from the outboard seating
positions?
Yes – Fixed 2nd Row Only
N/A – Sliding 2nd Row Seat
Fixed 2nd Row Seating: You can install child restraints with flexible
lower anchors in the center position. The inner anchorages are
18 inches (460 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints with rigid
lower anchors in the center position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if
the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child
restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every seating position if
they interfere with the installation of the child restraint Ú page 38.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
Sliding 2nd Row Seat:
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
LATCH Anchorages — Sliding 2nd Row Seat
Fixed 2nd Row Seat:
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
LATCH Anchorages — Fixed 2nd Row Seat
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located on the back of the seat.
Tether Anchorage Locations
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
SAFETY 317
(Continued)
Center Seat LATCH
Sliding 2nd Row Seat:
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in
the rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used for
the right outboard position behind the front
passenger (1). Anchorages D and E are used for
the left outboard position behind the driver (3).
Anchorages C and D are used for the center
seating position (2). Do not
install a
LATCH-compatible child restraint using
anchorages B and C. This is not a
LATCH–compatible position in your vehicle.
You can install up to two child seats using the
LATCH system at the same time. If you can fit
three child restraints in your vehicle, you must
use the seat belt to install the center child
restraint and you must use the LATCH anchors
for position (3) behind the driver. You can use
either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat
belt for installing the third child seat in position
(1) behind the front passenger.
Sliding Second Row Seat Lower Anchors
Options for installing two child seats using the
LATCH anchorages in this vehicle:
1. Right and left outboard seating positions
(1 and 3): Install the child seats in the right
and left outboard seating positions using
lower anchorages A and B, and D and E.
Do not use the center seat anchorage, C. If
the child seats do not block the center seat
belt webbing and buckle, the center seat
belt can be used to restraint an occupant
or child restraint in the center seating
position.
2. Right outboard and center seating positions
(1 and 2): Install the first child seat in the
right outboard seating position using lower
anchorages A and B. Install the second child
seat using the center anchorages, C and D.
Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the
opposite door, E. Do not use the remaining
left outboard seating position (3) for any
occupant. The center child restraint will block
the seat belt buckle for this position.
WARNING!
Use anchorages C and D to install a
LATCH-compatible child restraint in the
center seating position (2). Do not
install a
LATCH-compatible child restraint using
anchorages B and C. This is not a
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
A child restraint installed in the center posi-
tion (2) will block the seat belt buckle for
the empty left outboard seat behind the
driver (3). Do not use this seat for another
occupant.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 SAFETY
Fixed 2nd Row Seat:
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower
attachments in the center seating position. Only
install this type of child restraint in the outboard
seating positions. Child restraints with flexible,
webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
Fixed Second Row Seat LATCH Positions
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See Ú page 320 to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit.
If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint.
If you are installing three child restraints
next to each other, you must use the seat
belt and the center tether anchor for the
center position. You must use the LATCH
anchors to install the child seat in position
(3), behind the driver. You may use either
the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat
belt for installing the child seat in position
(1), behind the front passenger. For typical
installation instructions, see Ú page 318.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. If you
are installing LATCH-compatible child
restraints next to each other, you must use
the seat belt for the center position. You can
then use either the LATCH anchors or the
vehicle’s seat belt for installing child seats in
the outboard positions. For typical installation
instructions, see Ú page 318.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
SAFETY 319
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage.
See Ú page 323 for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward
into the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. See the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description Ú page 293 for additional
information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
(Sliding Seat)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
(Fixed Seat)
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
SAFETY 321
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child
restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back
of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every seating
position if they interfere with the installation of the child
restraint Ú page 38.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat
belt against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/
or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This means the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap.
See Ú page 323 for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
SAFETY 323
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to find
the tether anchorage. You may need to
move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise
the head restraint, and where possible, route
the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower
the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head
restraint.
Tether Anchorage Locations
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the
location of approved tether anchorages in
your vehicle.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 SAFETY
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
SAFETY 325
(Continued)
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have
an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could
permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault
with the Air Bag System has been detected. It
will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
See Ú page 284 for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle
in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
6
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 SAFETY
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold
inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check the area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal
(if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
WARNING! (Continued)
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
327
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located in
the lower center area of the instrument panel.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
Flashers may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the Rearview Mirror contains a SOS
and a ASSIST button.
1 — SOS Button
2 — Power Button
3 — ASSIST Button
7
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber Ú page 423.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) 3G or 4G (data) network, which
comes as a built in function. Other Uconnect
services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data),
3G or 4G (data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you’ll be connected to someone who can help.
Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle
you’re driving and its location. Additional fees
may apply for roadside assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the
cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the SOS and
ASSIST buttons on the Rearview Mirror will
turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to a SOS operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 329
(Continued)
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open a
voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between
the SOS and ASSIST buttons will continuously
illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact an authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data), 3G or 4G (data) network
and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals
are unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data), 3G or 4G (data) network
congestion
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services.
If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 331
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data), 3G or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data),
3G or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data),
3G or 4G (data) network connection and a GPS
signal is required for the SOS Call system to
function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
FUSES
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
7
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
UNDERHOOD FUSES
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This
center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses and
relays. A label that identifies each component is
printed on the inside of the cover.
Power Distribution Center Cover
CAUTION!
If it is necessary to wash the engine
compartment, take care not to directly hit the
fuse box, and the windshield wiper motors
with water.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse With A Good/Functional Fuse
Element.
3 — Blade Fuse With A Bad / Not Functional Fuse
Element (Blown Fuse).
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 333
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
F06 – – Not Used
F07 15 Amp Blue –
Powertrain Control Mod (PCM) (Diesel) / Surge Solenoid Purge Valve (Gas) – If
Equipped
F08 25 Amp Clear – Fuel Injectors (Gas), ECM (Gas), PCM/Fuel Injectors (Diesel)
F09
15 Amp Blue (Gas)
10 Amp Red (Diesel)
–
Coolant Pump (Gas) – If Equipped
UREA Coolant Pump/PCM (Diesel) – If Equipped
F10 20 Amp Yellow – Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
F11 – – Not Used
F12 10 Amp Red – Supply And Purging Pump (Diesel)
F13 10 Amp Red –
Voltage Stability Mod (VSM)/Powertrain Control Mod (PCM)/Engine Control
Module (ECM)
F14 10 Amp Red –
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)/Power Take-Off Unit (PTU)/Electric Park Brake
(EPB)/RDM/Brake System Module (BSM) – If Equipped/Brake Pedal Switch/Back
Up Lamp Switch (Diesel)
F15 – – Not Used
F16 20 Amp Yellow – Ign Coils / Additional Diesel Content
F17 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump (GAS GMET4/V6 Engines Only)
F18 – – Not Used
F19 – 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid
F20 10 Amp Red – A/C Compressor Clutch
F21 – – Not Used
7
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F22 5 Amp Tan – Radiator Fan (PWM) Enable
F23 50 Amp Red – Voltage Stability Module (VSM) #2
F24 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Wiper
F25B 20 Amp Yellow – FT/RR Washer
F26 – 30 Amp Pink Fuel Heater (Diesel)
F27 – – Not Used
F28 15 Amp Blue – Transmission Control Module (TCM/Shifter)
F29 – – Not Used
F30 10 Amp Red –
Engine Control Module (ECM)/(EPS)/Fuel Pump Relay Feed/(PCM)/Gas
Particulate Filter (GPF)
F31 – – Not Used
F32 – – Not Used
F33 – – Not Used
F34 – – Not Used
F35 – – Not Used
F36 – – Not Used
F37 – – Not Used
F38 – 60 Amp Yellow Glow Plugs (Diesel)
F39 – 40 Amp Green HVAC Blower Motor
F40 – 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Park Light – If Equipped
F41 – 50 Amp Red Voltage Stability Module (VSM) #1
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 335
F42 – 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Module – If Equipped
F43 20 Amp Yellow – Fuel Pump Motor
F44 – 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Receptacle - If Equipped
F45 – 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door Module (PDM) – If Equipped
F46 – 25 Amp Clear Sunroof Control Module - If Equipped
F47 – – Not Used
F48 – 30 Amp Pink Driver Door Module — If Equipped
F49 – 30 Amp Pink Power Inverter (115 Volt/220 Volt A/C) — If Equipped
F50 – 30 Amp Pink Power Liftgate Module — If Equipped
F51 – – Not Used
F52 – 30 Amp Pink Front Wipers
F53 – 30 Amp Pink Brake System Module (BSM) - ECU And Valves
F54 – 30 Amp Pink Body Control Module (BCM) Feed 3
F55 10 Amp Red – Blind Spot Sensors/Rearview Camera, Rear Heated Seat Switch — If Equipped
F56 15 Amp Blue –
Ignition Node Module (IGNM)/KIN/RF Hub/Electric Steering Column Lock (ESCL),
Dual USB Port – RR Console
F57 20 Amp Yellow – Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn Lights - If Equipped
F58 10 Amp Red – Occupant Classification Module/VSM/TT Mod/ESCL
F59 – 30 Amp Pink Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) – If Equipped
F60 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet – Center Console
F61 20 Amp Yellow – Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn Lights - If Equipped
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
7
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F62 20 Amp Yellow – Windshield De-Icer – If Equipped
F63 20 Amp Yellow – Front Heated/Ventilated Seats - If Equipped
F64 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Heated Seats – If Equipped
F65 10 Amp Red –
In Vehicle Temperature Sensor/Humidity Sensor/Driver Assist System Module
(DASM)/Park Assist (PAM) — If Equipped
F66 15 Amp Blue – HVAC (ECC)/Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Gateway Module
F67 – – Not Used
F68 – – Not Used
F69 10 Amp Red – Transfer Case Switch (TSBM)/Active Grill Shutter (AGS) – If Equipped
F70 5 Amp Tan – Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F71 – – Not Used
F72 10 Amp Red – Heated Mirrors (Gas) / PM Sensor (Diesel) — If Equipped
F73 – 20 Amp Blue NOX Sensor #1 & #2 / Trailer Tow Backup (NAFTA & Gas)
F74 – 30 Amp Pink Rear Defroster (EBL)
F75 20 Amp Yellow – Cigar Lighter – If Equipped
F76 20 Amp Yellow – Rear Differential Module (RDM) - If Equipped
F77 10 Amp Red – Hands Free Module, Brake Pedal Switch — If Equipped
F78 10 Amp Red – Diagnostic Port / Digital TV / TBM
F79 10 Amp Red –
Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Electric Park Brake (EPB) SW/CD Mod/Steering
Control Mod (SCCM)/HVAC/Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)
F80 20 Amp Yellow – Radio
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 337
F81 – – Customer Selectable Location For F91 Power Outlet Feed
F82 5 Amp Tan – Cybersecurity Gateway Module
F83 –
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
Engine Controller Module (Gas)
SCU Module (Diesel)
F84 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Left
F85 15 Amp Blue – (CSWM) Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
F86 20 Amp Yellow – Horns
F87 – – Not Used
F88 10 Amp Red – Seat Belt Reminder (SBR)/Smart Camera — If Equipped
F89 10 Amp Red – Auto Headlamp Leveling (If Equipped) / Headlamp
F90 – – Not Used
F91 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet Rear – If Equipped – Customer Selectable
F92 – – Not Used
F93 – 40 Amp Green Brake System Module (BSM) – Pump Motor
F94 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Right
F95 10 Amp Red –
Sunroof Module / Rain Sensor Module (LRSM) / Electrochromatic Mirror Module
(ECMM) / Dual USB Port (Rear)/ Power Outlet Console Illumination / Digital TV
F96 10 Amp Red – Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)/(Airbag)
F97 10 Amp Red – Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)/(Airbag)
F98 25 Amp Clear – Audio Amplifier/ANC — If Equipped
F99 – – Not Used
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
7
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
* 30 Amp mini fuse is substituted for 25 Amp Circuit Breaker.
INTERIOR FUSES
The interior fuse panel is located on the Body Control Module (BCM) in the passenger compartment on the left side dash panel under the instrument panel.
F100 – – Not Used
Circuit Breakers
CB1 30 Amp * Power Seat (Driver)
CB2 30 Amp * Power Seat (Pass)
CB3 25 Amp Power Window
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
F32 10 Amp Red Interior Lighting
F36 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module/Siren – If Equipped
F38 20 Amp Yellow Deadbolt All Unlock
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front
F48 25 Amp Clear Fog Lamp Rear Left/Right – If Equipped
F49 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Support
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Wireless Charging Pad – If Equipped
F51 7.5 Amp Brown Driver Window Switch/Power Mirrors – If Equipped
F53 7.5 Amp Brown UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F89 15 Amp Blue Door Locks – Driver Unlock
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 339
(Continued)
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as
possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P)
(automatic transmission) or REVERSE
(manual transmission).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position.
For example, if changing the driver’s front
tire, chock the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
F91 7.5 Amp Brown Left Front Fog Lamp (Low And High Line)
F92 7.5 Amp Brown Right Front Fog Lamp (High Line)
F93 10 Amp Red Low Beam Right
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION /SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
The jack, wheel chocks, and spare tire are stowed
under the load floor behind the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the load floor handle, then lift access
cover to locate jack and tools.
Load Floor Handle
3. Remove the hook from the stowed position
on the back side of the load floor and place
the hook over the top body flange and
weather seal. This will hold the load floor up
while obtaining the jack and spare tire.
4. Remove the fastener securing the jack and
spare tire.
Removing Jack And Spare Tire Fastener
5. Remove the chocks.
6. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt
wrench from the spare wheel as an
assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left to
loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove
the wrench from the jack assembly.
Jack And Tool Assembly
NOTE:
The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is
partially expanded, the tension between the two
attachment points holds the jack handle in place.
7. Remove the spare tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 341
(Continued)
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, wheel chocks,
and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where
the center cap covers the wheel bolts, use
the wheel bolt wrench to pry the center cap
off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel
bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the
wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire.
Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set an
automatic transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To ensure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
7
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that
is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw
clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle
with the lift area of the sill flange, centering
the jack saddle inside the cutout in the sill
cladding.
Jacking Locations
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the
flat tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 343
7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack
assembly and thread the pin into the wheel
hub to assist in mounting the spare tire.
Installing Alignment Pin
8. Mount the spare tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped, do not attempt to
install a center cap or wheel cover on the
compact spare Ú page 401.
9. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
Installing Wheel Bolts
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted
incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered to the ground.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
7
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of the
handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
wheel bolt has been tightened twice. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station
Ú page 411.
Assembled Jack
12. After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel
bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure
that all wheel bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
13. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks, and
flat tire.
Reinstalling Jack and Tire Fastener
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the
tire tread can be sealed with a Tire Service Kit.
Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not
be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can
be used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal,
allowing you to drive your vehicle up to
100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 345
TIRE SERVICE KIT STORAGE
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load
floor behind the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor
handle.
Load Floor Handle
TIRE SERVICE KIT COMPONENTS AND
O
PERATION
NOTE:
Tire service kit may vary, depending on trim
level.
Tire Service Kit Components
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the
Tire Service Kit)
1 — Power Button
2 — Mode Select Knob
3 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
4 — Sealant Bottle
5 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
6 — Sealant Bottle Release Button
7 — Power Plug
8 — Pressure Gauge
9 — Deflation Button
7
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the
following symbols to indicate the air or sealant
mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position for air pump
operation only. Use the Black Air Pump Hose
when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position to inject the
Tire Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire.
Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) when
selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
once to turn on the Tire Service Kit.
Push and release the Power Button again to
turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to
reduce the air pressure in the tire if
it becomes overinflated.
TIRE SERVICE KIT USAGE PRECAUTIONS
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle
and Sealant Hose prior to the expiration date
(printed at the upper right hand corner or
the lower right corner on the bottle label,
depending on the vehicles trim level) to
assure optimum operation of the system
Ú page 351.
Tire Service Kit Sealant Expiration Date Location
Tire Service Kit Sealant Expiration Date Location
The Sealant Bottle and Sealant Hose are a
one tire application use and need to be
replaced after each use. Always replace
these components immediately at your orig-
inal equipment vehicle dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water and a damp cloth will
remove the material from the vehicle or tire
and wheel components. Once the sealant
dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the
valve stem on the wheel is free of debris
before connecting the Tire Service Kit.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 347
(Continued)
(Continued)
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with
two needles, located in the Accessory Storage
Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump)
for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflat-
able items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose and make sure the Mode Select Knob is
in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire
Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal
punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter
in the tread of your tire.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of
the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being hit
when using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is
approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving
on a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
Tire Service Kit in the place provided.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
WARNING! (Continued)
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair,
eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is
harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately
with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with
clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician imme-
diately.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SEALING A TIRE WITH TIRE SERVICE KIT
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service
Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near
to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service
Kit Hoses and to reach the valve stem and
keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground.
This will provide the best positioning of the
kit when injecting the sealant into the
deflated tire and running the air pump.
Move the vehicle as necessary to place
the valve stem in this position before
proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (P)
(auto transmission) or in Gear (manual
transmission) and place the ignition in the
OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to
the Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the
cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
next to the deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and
then screw the fitting at the end of the
Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug
into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into
The Deflated Tire:
Always start the engine before turning ON the
Tire Service Kit.
NOTE:
Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the gear selector in
NEUTRAL.
After pushing the Power Button, the sealant
(white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle
through the Sealant Hose and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 349
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem. Make sure the valve
stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant
Hose to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob is in the Sealant Mode position
and not Air Mode. Push the Power Button to
turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle,
if available. Make sure the engine is running
before turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to
previous use. Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the Mode Select Knob is on Air Mode and the
pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose only, not the Sealant Hose.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant
is no longer flowing through the hose
(typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the
sealant flows through the Sealant Hose,
the Pressure Gauge can read as high as
70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge will
decrease quickly from approximately
70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire
immediately after the Sealant Bottle is
empty. Continue to operate the pump and
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on
the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check
the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure
Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
NOTE:
Never operate the compressor for longer than
20 minutes. Risk of Overheating.
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt
to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure
or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button to turn off the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
top of the Sealant Bottle and place the
sticker on the instrument panel.
7
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the
fitting at the end of the hose, and place the
Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating
the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or
10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire
Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location Ú page 348.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to
the Air Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug
into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (black in color)
and screw the fitting at the end of hose onto
the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the
Pressure Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the
pressure indicated on the tire and loading
information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve
stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper
storage area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
authorized dealer or tire service center.
CAUTION!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may
get hot after use, so it should be handled
carefully.
Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at
the end of the Sealant Hose can result in
sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and
the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in
sealant contacting internal Tire Service Kit
components which may cause permanent
damage to the kit.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired
or replaced after using Tire Service Kit.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the
tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow
this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 351
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
instrument panel after the tire has been
repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle and Sealant
Hose assembly at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible Ú page 351.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has
been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (clear in color).
2. Locate the red colored round Sealant Bottle
release button at the lower right hand
corner of the kit.
3. Push and hold the Sealant Bottle release
button, then pull out the bottle holding the
button.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire
Service Kit housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle in the
housing so that the Sealant Hose aligns
with the hose slot in the front of the
housing. Push and hold the Sealant Bottle
release button, then push the bottle into the
housing by holding the button. An audible
click will be heard indicating the bottle is
locked into place. Release the button.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting
at the end of the Sealant Hose and return
the hose to its storage area (located on top
of the housing).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage
location in the vehicle.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
7
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front
of the engine compartment, behind the left
headlight assembly.
Under Hood Battery Location
Positive Battery Post
See below steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK (P) and
turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact.
You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 353
Connecting The Jumper Cables
Jumper Cable Connections
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt.
The ground must be away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle for a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the
disconnecting procedure below.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the
negative (-) jumper cable from the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the
positive (+) jumper cable from the
positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle, you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause
the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 RPM since it provides no charging
benefit, wastes fuel, and can damage booster
vehicle engine.
7
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
For emergency fuel filling procedures
Ú page 161.
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel.
If refueling is necessary, while using an
approved gas can, please insert the refueling
funnel into the filler neck opening.
Refueling Funnel
Inserting Funnel
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating your
engine by taking the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 355
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK (P) position,
you can use the following procedure to
temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, carefully
separate the shifter bezel and boot
assembly from the center console, and
raise it up to access the gear selector
mechanism.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool
down into the gear selector override access
hole (at the right front corner of the gear
selector assembly), and push and hold the
override release lever down.
Override Access Hole
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N)
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in
NEUTRAL (N).
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
7
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then shift back and forth between DRIVE (D)
and REVERSE (R), while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
NOTE:
Push the “ESC OFF” switch (if necessary), to
place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system in “Partial Off” mode, before rocking the
vehicle Ú page 265. Once the vehicle has been
freed, push the “ESC OFF” switch again to
restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least
one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission
failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),
or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 357
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described under Ú page 172.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose,
following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members
of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumper or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
FWD MODELS
4X4 MODELS
1–SPEED
POWER TRANSFER UNIT
2–SPEED
POWER TRANSFER UNIT
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Detailed instructions Ú page 172
Transmission in PARK
Power Transfer Unit in NEUTRAL
Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD
7
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle,
to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake
engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature
is enabled or disabled via the customer
programmable features in the Uconnect
Settings.
Vehicles with a discharged battery or total
electrical failure when the Electric Park Brake
(EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or
jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground
when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
NOTE:
The Safehold feature will engage the Electric
Park Brake whenever the driver's door is
opened (if the ignition is ON, transmission is
not in PARK, and brake pedal is released). If you
are towing this vehicle with the ignition in the
ON/RUN mode, you must manually disable the
Electric Park Brake each time the driver's door
is opened, by pressing the brake pedal and then
releasing the EPB.
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, for instructions on
shifting the transmission out of PARK (P) for
towing Ú page 355.
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) M ODELS
The FCA US LLC recommends towing your
vehicle with all four wheels OFF of the ground
using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this
vehicle must be towed with the front wheels
OFF of the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel
lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
The Electric Park Brake does not need to be
released, if all four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 359
4X4 MODELS WITH 1–SPEED POWER
T
RANSFER UNIT
The FCA US LLC requires towing with all four
wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
4X4 MODELS WITH 2–SPEED POWER
T
RANSFER UNIT
The FCA US LLC recommends towing with all
four wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the
Power Transfer Unit is operable, vehicles with a
2–speed Power Transfer Unit may be towed (in
the forward direction, with ALL wheels on the
ground), under the following conditions:
The Power Transfer Unit must be in
NEUTRAL (N).
The transmission must be in PARK (P).
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while being
towed Ú page 172.
RECOVERY STRAP — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be included with a recovery
strap. Recovery straps do not act like traditional
tow straps, chains, or winch cables.
CAUTION!
DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its
wheels on the ground. Damage to the drive-
train will result.
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used
(if the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
power transfer unit will occur if a front or
rear wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or power transfer unit damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used
(if the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
power transfer unit will occur if a front or
rear wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or power transfer unit damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
7
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Using Recovery Strap
1. Review all warnings and instructions first.
2. Position the recovery vehicle.
3. Connect the recovery strap.
4. Add a recovery damper or blanket.
5. Clear the danger zone.
6. Safely and slowly start pulling.
7. Disconnect the recovery strap after both
vehicles are secure and parked.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact. Detailed
information can be found on Ú page 307.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder. The main purpose of an (EDR) is to
record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle. Detailed information can be found on
Ú page 308.
WARNING!
Recovery straps should only be used in
emergencies to rescue stranded vehicles.
Only use Recovery straps on vehicles that fit
within the recommended Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) of your recovery strap. Only
attach recovery straps to OE recommended
anchor points or emergency towing anchor
points. Never attach to tow ball or vehicle tie
down point, these are not designed for this
purpose. Never attach to vehicle steering,
drive train, or any other suspension
components. NEVER pull a strap over sharp
edges or abrasive surfaces that can damage
the recovery strap. NEVER use a damaged
strap, it has reduced strength. DO NOT
attempt to repair straps. ONLY persons
involved in the recovery should be in either
vehicle. No passengers. Anyone inside the
vehicles can be struck by strap recoil, causing
serious injury. MOVE bystanders at least 40 ft
(12.2 m) from the recovery area when using
the recovery strap.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 361
BULB REPLACEMENT
REPLACEMENT BULBS
NOTE:
See an Authorized Dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Cargo Lamp TL212–2
Overhead Console Lamp PLW214–2A
Reading Lamp WL212–2
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Front Park/Daytime Running Lamps LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamps LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamps LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
7
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
REPLACING EXTERIOR BULBS
Back-up Lamp
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver at
the top of the bulb access cover to pry the
lower trim panel from the liftgate.
3. Once the access panel is loose, pull it back
exposing the insulation.
4. Move insulation towards center of vehicle to
expose the back of liftgate lamp.
5. Twist the socket counterclockwise and
remove from lamp.
6. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
7. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket.
8. Move insulation back to original position.
9. Close the liftgate.
Rear Turn Signal Lamps LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Back-Up Lamps W21W
License Plate Lamp LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
363
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate.
This means that service is required for your
vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, or extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the
“Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Severe operating conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as
3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
is performed by someone other than an
authorized dealer, the message can be reset
by referring to the steps described under
Instrument Cluster Display Ú page 89.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Vehicles that are operated in a dusty and
off-road environment, or predominately at idle
or very low engine RPM are known as Severe
Duty vehicles. It is recommended that you
change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time.
At Every Fuel Stop:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the
oil indicator system turns on.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir
and brake master cylinder; fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights.
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the following required maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires
NOTE:
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
Inspect the CV/Universal joints
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals. tie rod ends, and
replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pulley,
and replace if necessary.
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Clean and lube sun roof tracks. X X X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs — 2.0L Engine
1
X X
Replace spark plugs — 2.4L & 3.2L Engine
2
X
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
2. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunc-
tion and affect vehicle handling and perfor-
mance. This could cause an accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 367
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Oil Fill Cap 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2.4L ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Oil Fill Cap 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 369
3.2L ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Battery
2 — Oil Filter Access Cover 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 9 — Engine Oil Fill
5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such
as every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end
of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is
at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the
oil level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The windshield and rear window washers share
the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is
located in the front of the engine compartment.
Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir
at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few
seconds to flush out the residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will
help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371
MAINTENANCE -FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, and
periodic maintenance is not required.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result
in civil penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water Ú page 351.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard
all parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection — 2.0L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils
that are API SP/GF-6 certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-13340. An equivalent full synthetic engine
oil can be used if it meets API SP/GF-6
Certification. If API SP/GF-6 or equivalent oil
is unavailable then please contact a local
dealership for recommendation.
Engine Oil Selection — 2.4L & 3.2L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are
API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been
certified by the American Petroleum
Institute (API). The manufacturer only
recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle.
Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately
discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer,
service station or governmental agency for
advice on how and where used oil and oil filters
can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be
used for replacement. The quality of replacement
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
Mopar certified filters should be used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 373
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
Refer to the Maintenance Plan in this section for
the proper maintenance intervals
Ú
page 364.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar certified
filters should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris. If you find evidence of either dirt or
debris you should change your air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Remove the screws from the engine air
cleaner filter cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. If equipped with a 2.0L, remove the screws
from the engine air cleaner filter cover and
disconnect the electrical sensor.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)
unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near
the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so
can result in serious personal injury.
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Screws
1 — Screws
2 — Electrical Connector
3 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to
access the engine air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
4. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from
the housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing assembly if dirt
or debris is present before replacing the engine
air cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air
cleaner filter inspection surface facing
downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover
onto the housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Install screws to secure the engine air
cleaner filter cover to the housing assembly
and reconnect the electrical connector
(if equipped).
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt
from rib to rib, are considered normal. These
are not a reason to replace belt. However,
cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib
must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if
it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe
glazing.
1— Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with the vehicle running.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
tent mechanic.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 375
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
rated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is
installed.
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools; we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book,
located in your owner’s information kit, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an
ozone-friendly substance. It is recommended
that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed
by the Environmental Protection Agency and
is an ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. It is recommended that
air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement
(A/C Air Filter)
The A/C air filter is located in front of the
evaporator on the lower right of center console.
Perform the following procedure to replace the
filter:
1. Remove the passenger side console
closeout cover.
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to
disengage the front retaining tab and
remove the cover.
Console Closeout Panel
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air
filter removed and the blower operating, the
blower can contact hands and may propel
dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 377
3. Pull down the passenger hush panel under
the dash panel.
Hush Panel
4. Remove the filter door by pushing down the
tab on the top of the door to release the
cover then rotate the door out and lift up.
Air Filter Cover Location
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it
straight out of the housing. Take note of the
air filter position indicators.
A/C Air Filter
6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter
position indicators pointing in the same
direction as removal.
7. Install the passenger side hush panel under
the dash panel and console closeout.
Refer to the Maintenance Plan in this chapter
for the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 364.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result
in the need to replace it more often.
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using
the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. If chattering, marks, water lines or wet
spots are present, clean the wiper blades or
replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm
or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 379
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper
blade and while holding the wiper arm with
one hand, slide the wiper blade down
towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding
the wiper arm with one hand and separating
the wiper blade from the wiper arm with the
other hand (move the wiper blade toward the
right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper
blade from the wiper arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the
tip of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab
open and the blade side of the wiper facing
up and away from the windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through
the opening in the wiper blade under the
release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade
until it is flush against the wiper arm. Fold
down the latch release tab and snap it into
its locked position. Latch engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper
blade nearest to wiper arm with one hand.
With your left hand hold the wiper arm as
you pull the wiper blade away from the
wiper arm past its stop far enough to
unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the
receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper
blade, move the wiper blade upward and
away from the wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto
the glass.
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Blade
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 381
(Continued)
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab
the bottom end of the wiper arm with one
hand, and apply pressure on the wiper
blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps
into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and
snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into
place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO see
Ú page 324.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system.
Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunc-
tion, particularly involving engine misfire or
other apparent loss of performance, have
your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued
operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to
overheat, resulting in possible damage to
the converter and vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the
catalytic converter will not require
maintenance. However, it is important to keep
the engine properly tuned to ensure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze)
protection every 12 months (before the onset
of freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant is dirty, the system should be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming
to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check
the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean
by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radiator
or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 383
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the Maintenance Plan in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 364.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to Engine Fluids And Lubricants for
further information Ú page 417.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protec-
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a
non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant.
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant
is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle is built with engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended
maintenance period, it is important that you
use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant
conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Please review these recommendations for
using OAT engine coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant solution. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed
in an emergency, have an authorized dealer
drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant will return to the radiator
from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery
tank if equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 385
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the
disposal rules for your community. To prevent
ingestion by animals or children, do not store
ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground,
clean up any ground spills immediately.
If ingested, seek emergency assistance
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine off and cold, the
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated
on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the radiator/
coolant pressure cap unless checking for
engine coolant freeze point or replacing
coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant only needs to be
checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of
the coolant expansion bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which
contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected
periodically. Refer to the Maintenance Plan for
the proper maintenance intervals
Ú
page 364.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the brake master cylinder
should be checked whenever the vehicle is
serviced, or immediately if the brake system
warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to
bring level within the designated marks on
the side of the reservoir of the brake master
cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the master
cylinder area before removing cap. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. If the brake
fluid is abnormally low, check the system for
leaks. Refer to Chassis Fluids And Lubricants
for further information Ú page 417.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to Chassis Fluids And
Lubricants for further information
Ú
page 417. Using the wrong type of brake
fluid can severely damage your brake system
and/or impair its performance. The proper
type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid
that has been in a tightly closed container.
Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap
secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open
container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or
prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 387
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
E
QUIPPED
Special Additives
It is strongly recommended against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired
by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not
add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission
damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use only the manufacturer's specified
transmission fluid
Ú
page 417. It is important to
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder.
Refer to Fluids And Lubricants for fluid
specifications Ú page 417.
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 389
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 391
Tire Terminology And Definitions
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
392 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard Ú page 162.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 393
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight
(if applicable) should never exceed the weight
referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393
394 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 395
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping
distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395
396 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining
correct tire inflation pressure is very important.
Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle
operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer
or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 397
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to
be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after
driving with underinflated tire condition, please
replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to
be reused when driven under run flat mode
14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information Ú page 279.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397
398 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed.
Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear
Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of
your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 399
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
Tire Safety Information for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of
a tire Ú page 389.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling.
If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications
or capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399
400 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance
on ice, skid and traction capability on wet
or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to Tire
Service Kit Ú page 344.
Refer to Towing Requirements - Tires for
restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 169.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with a compact or limited use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 401
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators,
the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be
replaced. Since it is not the same as your original
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401
402 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar
Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their
equivalent is recommended or select a
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners
and automatic car washes may damage the
wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 403
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow
these recommendations to guard against damage.
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
FWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
Sport
Latitude
Latitude Plus
Limited
Overland
Front
215/60R17
17 x7.0 x 41 mm
7 mm Cable Chain
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403
404 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
4X4 - Jeep Active Drive I
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
Sport
Latitude
Latitude Plus
Trailhawk
Limited
Overland
Front
215/60R17
17 x7.0 x 41mm
9mm Cable Chain
4X4 - Jeep Active Drive II
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
Latitude
Latitude Plus
Limited
Overland
Front
225/65R17
17 x 7.0 x 41mm
225/60R18
18 x 7.0 x 41mm
7mm Cable Chain
Trailhawk
225/65R17
17 x 7.5 x 31mm
9mm Cable Chain
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 405
(Continued)
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Use on front tires only.
Damage to Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models may result if tire chains or traction
devices are used with original equipment
size tires.
Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Models
without a Two-Speed Power Transfer Unit
may result if tire chains or traction devices
are used with original equipment size tires.
Damage to Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Trail-
hawk Models may result if tire chains or
traction devices are used with original
equipment size tires.
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
CAUTION! (Continued)
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405
406 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the proper
maintenance intervals
Ú
page 364. The reasons
for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected
prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some
directional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference
in tire size can cause damage to the power
transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should be
followed to balance tire wear.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 406
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 407
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than
three weeks, we recommend that you take the
following steps to minimize the drain on your
vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out
of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at
idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 407
408 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish.
Use precautions to not scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 408
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 409
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 409
410 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a
soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and
damage the leather upholstery and should be
removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and
Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid.
Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based
cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar Total Clean leather cleaner
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather upholstery, as damage to the
upholstery may result.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 410
411
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found
on the left front corner of the instrument panel.
The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle
through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
some loss of overall braking effectiveness.
You may notice increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the
engine OFF) the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that
required with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or
oil before tightening.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 Ft-Lbs
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.25 19 mm
9
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 411
412 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly tightened.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and
may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 412
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 413
2.0L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all
emission requirements, and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance, when using unleaded
“regular” gasoline having an octane rating of
87, as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The
use of 91 or higher octane “premium” gasoline
will allow these engines to operate to optimal
performance. This increase in performance is
most noticeable in hot weather or other heavier
load conditions, such as while towing.
2.4L AND 3.2L ENGINES
These engines are designed to meet
all emissions regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and
performance when using unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having a posted octane
number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of higher octane “Premium”
gasoline is not required, as it will not provide
any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these
engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
9
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 413
414 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
M ETHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL M ANGANESE
T
RICARBONYL (MMT) I N G ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark
plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer
recommends that gasoline without MMT be used
in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may
not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore,
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the
gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in
Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives
are recommended. Using gasolines that have
these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level
of detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 414
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 415
(Continued)
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
9
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 415
416 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 15.8 Gallons 60 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.0L Engine 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
2.4L Engine 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
3.2L Engine 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System*
2.0L Engine 9 Quarts 8.6 Liters
2.4L Engine 7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
3.2L Engine 10 Quarts 9.5 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 416
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 417
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula
OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Standard
MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 2.0L Engine
We recommend you use Mopar API SP/GF-6 Certified SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic SAE
5W-30 engine oil can be used if it meets API SP/GF-6 Certification. If API SP/GF-6 or equivalent oil
is unavailable then please contact a local dealership for recommendation.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended API SP/GF-6 or equivalent oil can cause engine damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 3.2L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Fuel Selection – 2.0L, 2.4L and 3.2L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
9
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 417
418 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products.
Do not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-
rust products, as they may not be compat-
ible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 418
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 419
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used.
9
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 419
420
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with
the service manager. Keep a maintenance log
of your vehicle's service history. This can often
provide a clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation
with the service advisor and list the items in order of
priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain
a rental vehicle (additional charges may apply).
If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these
arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to
be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have
the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer’s service manager first. If for
some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to
the general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to
resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US
LLC Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (mobile, home
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC C USTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 420
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 421
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, the manufacturer has installed
special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for
the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who has
access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate
with FCA US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call FCA US LLC's Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle.
An authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
ensure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 421
422 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle to keep it operating at its best and
maintain its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON , D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to
http://www.safercar.gov
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from
http://www.safercar.gov
.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety
defect, you should contact the Customer
Service Department immediately. Canadian
customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should
contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle
Defect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/
Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP
.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
a complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 422
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 423
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These manuals make it easy to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all
tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om
To order a hard copy of your Owner's
Information, call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s
Information, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
10
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 423
424
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes .........................................411
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control) .................................... 128 , 130
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............383
Adding Fuel ....................................................161
Additives, Fuel ...............................................414
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................224
Air Bag ...........................................................296
Air Bag Operation ......................................297
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 295 , 298
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................303
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 307, 360
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................360
Front Air Bag ................................... 296 , 298
If Deployment Occurs ................................306
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................303
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............307
Maintenance .............................................307
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............296
Transporting Pets ......................................324
Air Bag Light ..................................97 , 295, 325
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air
Cleaner Filter) ................................................373
Air Conditioner Maintenance .........................375
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 375 , 376
Air Conditioner System ................................. 375
Air Conditioning Filter ..............................65 , 376
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................64
Air Filter ........................................................ 373
Air Pressure
Tires
......................................................... 396
Alarm
Arm The System
..........................................23
Disarm The System .....................................24
Security Alarm ....................................23 , 100
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ................................... 120
Android Auto ........................................ 226 , 228
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 383 , 416
Disposal ................................................... 385
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 262
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 100
Apple CarPlay ....................................... 226 , 230
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 269
Audio Settings ............................................... 208
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 180
Auto Down Power Windows .............................66
Auto Up Power Windows ..................................66
Automatic Door Locks ......................................28
Automatic Headlights .......................................47
Automatic High Beams ....................................47
Automatic Tailgate Release .............................73
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............63
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 114
Automatic Transmission ................................ 115
Adding Fluid .............................................. 387
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 387
Fluid Change ............................................. 387
Fluid Level Check ...................................... 387
Fluid Type ................................................. 387
Special Additives ...................................... 387
Torque Converter ...................................... 120
Autostick ....................................................... 119
AUX Cord ..........................................................81
Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ....................................82
B
Battery ................................................... 98 , 371
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................16
Battery Saver Feature ......................................49
Belts, Seat .................................................... 325
Blind Spot Monitoring ................................... 273
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing
................ 218
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................ 377
B-Pillar Location ............................................ 392
Brake Assist System ............................ 263 , 277
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 424
425
Brake Control System
....................................263
Brake Fluid ....................................................386
Brake System ...................................... 386 , 411
Anti-Lock (ABS) ..........................................411
Fluid Check ...............................................386
Master Cylinder .........................................386
Parking ......................................................110
Warning Light .............................................. 97
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................115
Brightness, Interior Lights ................................ 50
Bulb Replacement .........................................361
Bulbs, Light ....................................................326
C
Camera, Rear
................................................160
Capacities, Fluid ............................................416
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine)
............................. 367 , 368, 369
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................384
Car Washes ...................................................408
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................415
Cargo Area Cover ............................................. 74
Cargo Compartment ........................................ 74
Cargo Load Floor ............................................. 74
Cargo Tie-Downs .............................................. 75
CD..................................................................211
Cellular Phone ...............................................260
Center Seat Storage Compartment ................. 80
Certification Label .........................................162
Changing A Flat Tire .......................................339
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 389
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light)
.............................................. 107
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 324
Checks, Safety .............................................. 324
Child Restraint .............................................. 309
Child Restraints
Booster Seats
........................................... 312
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 319
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 311
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 314
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 311
Seating Positions ...................................... 313
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 413
Cleaning
Wheels
..................................................... 402
Climate Control ................................................55
Cold Weather Operation ............................... 109
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 401
Connected Services ...................................... 231
Connected Services FAQ ............................... 252
Connected Services Features ....................... 236
Connected Services, Getting Started ............ 234
Connected Services, Introduction ................. 232
Console
Storage
........................................................80
Contract, Service .......................................... 421
Controls ........................................................ 200
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 384
Cooling System ............................................. 382
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 383
Coolant Level ............................................ 385
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 416
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 385
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 383
Inspection ........................................382 , 385
Points To Remember ................................ 385
Pressure Cap ............................................ 384
Radiator Cap ............................................. 384
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..... 383, 416
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 407
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ............. 128 , 130
Cruise Light .................................104 , 105, 106
Customer Assistance .................................... 420
Cybersecurity ................................................ 180
D
Daytime Running Lights ............................46 , 51
Dealer Service ............................................... 371
Defroster, Windshield ................................... 325
De-Icer, Remote Start ......................................23
Deleting A Phone ........................................... 218
Diagnostic System, Onboard ......................... 106
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 370
Disable Vehicle Towing ................................. 357
Disc Drive ...................................................... 211
Disconnecting ............................................... 218
11
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 425
426
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)
.......................385
Disturb...........................................................222
Door Ajar................................................... 98 , 99
Door Ajar Light ................................................. 99
Door Locks
Automatic .................................................... 28
Doors ............................................................... 24
Drag & Drop ...................................................198
Driver Memory Presets ..................................207
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 31
Driving ...........................................................177
E
Easy Entry Seats
.............................................. 36
Electric Brake Control System .......................263
Anti-Lock Brake System .............................262
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 264 , 272
Electric Parking Brake ...................................110
Electrical Power Outlets ...................................82
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......130
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...................265
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........ 98
Emergency
SOS Emergency Call
..................................327
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ......................354
Emergency, In Case Of
Gear Selector Override ..............................355
Hazard Warning Flasher ............................327
Jacking ..................................................... 339
Jump Starting ........................................... 351
Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 107
Engine.........................................367 , 368, 369
Air Cleaner ................................................ 373
Block Heater ............................................. 109
Break-In Recommendations ..................... 110
Checking Oil Level .................................... 370
Cooling ..................................................... 382
Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 415
Fails To Start ............................................ 109
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 109
Fuel Requirements ................................... 413
Jump Starting ........................................... 351
Oil .................................................... 372 , 416
Oil Filler Cap ...........................367 , 368, 369
Oil Filter .................................................... 372
Oil Reset ......................................................89
Oil Selection .................................... 372 , 416
Oil Synthetic ............................................. 372
Overheating .............................................. 354
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature
................................................ 307 , 360
Ethanol ......................................................... 413
Exhaust Gas Cautions ................................... 415
Exhaust System ............................................ 381
Exterior Lights .........................................45 , 326
F
Family Alerts ................................................. 250
Filters
Air Cleaner ................................................ 373
Air Conditioning ................................. 65 , 376
Engine Oil ................................................. 372
Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 372
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................................ 327
Turn Signals ..................................... 105 , 326
Flash-To-Pass ...................................................47
Flat Tire Changing ................................ 388 , 400
Flat Tire Stowage ................................. 388 , 400
Flooded Engine Starting ................................ 109
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 416
Fluid Leaks.................................................... 326
Fluid Level Checks
Brake
........................................................ 386
Engine Oil ................................................. 370
Fob, Key ...........................................................14
Fog Lights ........................................................48
Fold-Flat Seats .................................................31
Folding Rear Seats ...........................................34
Forward Collision Warning ............................ 277
Four Wheel Drive ........................................... 120
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................................. 356
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 426
427
Fuel
Additives
...................................................414
Clean Air ....................................................413
Ethanol ......................................................413
Light ..........................................................101
Materials Added ........................................414
Methanol ...................................................413
Tank Capacity ............................................416
Fueling...........................................................161
Fuses .............................................................331
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
.................... 76
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................413
Gasoline, Reformulated .................................413
Gear Ranges ..................................................116
Gear Selector Override ..................................355
Glass Cleaning ...............................................410
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...............................164
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ..........................164
GVWR ............................................................162
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ..............................327
Head Restraint Removal .................................. 38
Head Restraints ...............................................38
Head Rests ...................................................... 38
Headlights .......................................................46
Automatic ....................................................47
Automatic High Beam ..................................47
Cleaning ................................................... 408
High Beam ............................................45 , 47
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........47
On With Wipers ............................................48
Passing .................................................45 , 47
Switch..........................................................46
Time Delay...................................................48
Heated Mirrors .................................................45
Heated Seats ...................................................37
Heated Steering Wheel ....................................40
Heater, Engine Block .................................... 109
Hill Descent Control ...................................... 267
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 267
Hill Start Assist .............................................. 269
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 166
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................76
Hood Prop ........................................................71
Hood Release ..................................................71
I
Ignition
.............................................................18
Switch..........................................................18
Inside Rearview Mirror .....................43 , 44, 327
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ....................................... 85 , 105
Display .........................................................88
Engine Oil Reset ..........................................89
Menu Items ..........................................90 , 95
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 410
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 409
Interior Lights ...................................................49
Inverter
Power
...........................................................83
J
Jack Location
................................................ 339
Jack Operation .............................................. 339
Jacking And Tire Changing ............................ 339
Jump Starting ................................................ 351
K
Key Fob
Arm The System
...........................................23
Disarm The System ......................................24
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................16
Key Fob Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry)
....................................17
Keyless Enter-N-Go ..........................................26
Passive Entry ...............................................26
Keys .................................................................14
Replacement ...............................................17
11
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 427
428
L
Lane Change Assist
......................................... 49
LaneSense ....................................................155
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................................286
Latches..........................................................326
Hood ........................................................... 71
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................326
Life Of Tires ...................................................398
Liftgate ............................................................ 71
Closing ........................................................ 73
Hands-Free .................................................. 73
Opening ....................................................... 71
Light Bulbs.....................................................326
Lights.............................................................326
Air Bag.......................................97 , 295, 325
Automatic Headlights .................................. 47
Automatic High Beam .................................. 47
Brake Assist Warning ................................267
Brake Warning ............................................ 97
Bulb Replacement .....................................361
Cruise ..................................... 104 , 105, 106
Daytime Running ......................................... 46
Engine Temperature Warning ...................... 99
Exterior ...............................................45 , 326
Fog .............................................................. 48
High Beam ........................................... 45 , 47
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..................... 47
Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 267
Intensity Control ..........................................50
Interior.........................................................49
Lights On Reminder .....................................48
Low Fuel ................................................... 101
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ....... 102
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) .............51
Park .......................................................... 105
Passing ........................................................47
Seat Belt Reminder .....................................97
Security Alarm .......................................... 100
Service ..................................................... 361
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............. 279
Traction Control ........................................ 267
Turn Signals ............................. 49 , 105, 326
Vanity Mirror ......................................... 45 , 81
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
...................................99 , 105
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .......................95
Load Shed Battery Saver On ............................95
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ..............95
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ...............95
Loading Vehicle ............................................ 162
Tires ......................................................... 392
Locks
Automatic Door
............................................28
Child Protection ...........................................29
Power Door ..................................................25
Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 279
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 377
Lug Nuts/Bolts .............................................. 411
Luggage Carrier ................................................84
M
Maintenance
....................................................70
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 371
Maintenance Schedule ................................. 363
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine)
..................................... 102 , 107
Manual
Service
...................................................... 422
Media Hub .......................................................81
Media Mode .................................................. 210
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .....................29
Methanol....................................................... 413
Mirrors .............................................................43
Heated .........................................................45
Outside ........................................................44
Rearview ..................................... 43 , 44, 327
Vanity....................................................45 , 81
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
.........................................................10
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 279
Mopar Parts .................................................. 422
MP3 Control .....................................................81
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................45
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 428
429
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period
..........................110
O
Occupant Restraints
......................................284
Oil Filter, Change ...........................................372
Oil Filter, Selection .........................................372
Oil Pressure Light ............................................99
Oil Reset .......................................................... 89
Oil, Engine .....................................................372
Capacity ....................................................416
Checking ...................................................370
Dipstick .....................................................370
Disposal ....................................................372
Filter ..........................................................372
Filter Disposal ...........................................372
Identification Logo .....................................372
Materials Added To ...................................372
Pressure Warning Light ............................... 99
Recommendation ............................ 372 , 416
Synthetic ...................................................372
Viscosity ....................................................416
Onboard Diagnostic System ..........................106
Operating Precautions ...................................106
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ........................................422
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................ 44
Overheating, Engine ......................................354
P
Paddle Shifters ............................................. 119
Paint Care ..................................................... 407
Parking Brake ............................................... 110
ParkSense Active Park Assist ........................ 150
ParkSense System, Rear .............................. 141
Passive Entry ...................................................26
Personalized Main Menu Bar ........................ 198
Pets .............................................................. 324
Phone Mode ................................................. 213
Pinch Protection ..............................................70
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 392
Power
Brakes ...................................................... 411
Door Locks ..................................................25
Inverter ........................................................83
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ................82
Windows ......................................................66
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 293
Preparation For Jacking ................................ 339
Presets ......................................................... 207
Pretensioners
Seat Belts
................................................. 293
R
Radial Ply Tires ............................................. 397
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ........... 384
Radio
Presets
..................................................... 207
Radio Controls .............................................. 200
Radio Mode................................................... 200
Radio Operation ...................................200 , 260
Radio Remote Controls ................................. 199
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...........................53
Rear Camera ................................................. 160
Rear Cross Path ............................................ 276
Rear ParkSense System ................................ 141
Rear Seats, Folding ..........................................34
Rear Wiper/Washer .........................................54
Recreational Towing ...................................... 172
Shifting Into Power Transfer Unit
Neutral (N) ............................................ 174
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..... 174
Shifting Out Of Power Transfer Unit
Neutral (N)
............................................ 176
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ............................................ 176
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 413
Refrigerant .................................................... 376
Registering SiriusXM Guardian ..................... 233
Release, Hood ..................................................71
Reminder, Lights On ........................................48
Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 285
Remote Control
Starting System
...........................................20
Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock ... 240, 252
Remote Features, Horn And Lights ............... 242
Remote Features, Starting ................... 241 , 254
11
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 429
430
Remote Keyless Entry
...................................... 16
Arm The Alarm ............................................. 23
Disarm The Alarm ........................................ 24
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 17
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .........199
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .............................. 22
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features.................................................. 22
Uconnect Settings ....................................... 22
Remote Starting System .................................. 20
Replacement Keys ........................................... 17
Replacement Tires .........................................398
Reporting Safety Defects ...............................422
Restraints, Child ............................................309
Restraints, Head .............................................. 38
Roadside Assistance ........................... 242 , 253
Roll Over Warning .............................................. 9
Roof Type Carrier ............................................. 84
Rotation, Tires ...............................................405
S
Safety ............................................................198
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .........................325
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................326
Safety Defects, Reporting ..............................422
Safety Features .............................................198
Safety Information, Tire .................................388
Safety Tips .................................................... 324
Satellite Radio .............................................. 202
Saved Radio Stations ................................... 207
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 363
Seat Belt Reminder ..........................................97
Seat Belts ............................................ 285 , 325
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 289
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 289
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
............................................ 289
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 293
Child Restraints ........................................ 309
Energy Management Feature ................... 293
Extender ................................................... 292
Front Seat...............................285 , 286, 288
Inspection................................................. 325
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 288
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 289
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 286
Operating Instructions .............................. 288
Pregnant Women ...................................... 293
Pretensioners ........................................... 293
Rear Seat ................................................. 286
Reminder.................................................. 285
Seat Belt Extender .................................... 292
Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 293
Untwisting Procedure ............................... 289
Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 409
Seats................................................................31
Adjustment ..................................................31
Easy Entry ....................................................36
Head Restraints ...........................................38
Heated .........................................................37
Memory .......................................................29
Rear Folding ................................................31
Tilting ...........................................................31
Ventilated ....................................................38
Security Alarm ........................................ 23 , 100
Arm The System ...........................................23
Disarm The System ......................................24
Selec-Terrain ................................................. 124
Send & Go ............................................243 , 253
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................17
Sentry Key Replacement ..................................17
Service Assistance ........................................ 420
Service Contract ............................................ 421
Service Manuals ........................................... 422
Settings, Audio .............................................. 208
Shift Lever Override ...................................... 355
Shifting
Automatic Transmission
........................... 115
Power Transfer Unit, Shifting Into Power
Transfer Unit Neutral (N)
.............174, 176
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) ................................... 174
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) ................................... 176
Shoulder Belts .............................................. 286
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 430
431
Side View Mirror Adjustment
........................... 44
Signals, Turn ........................................ 105 , 326
Sirius Satellite Radio .....................................202
Favorites ...................................................204
Replay .......................................................203
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM ..........................................205
Favorites ...................................................204
Replay .......................................................203
Smart Watch ..................................................251
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............................403
Snow Tires .....................................................400
SOS Call............................................... 236 , 252
Spare Tires .......................................... 400 , 401
Speed Control
Cancel
.......................................................130
Resume .....................................................130
Starting ..........................................................108
Button ......................................................... 18
Cold Weather ............................................109
Engine Fails To Start .................................109
Remote ....................................................... 20
Starting Procedures .......................................108
Steering
Tilt Column
..................................................40
Wheel, Heated ...................................... 40 , 41
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......................199
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System .......199
Stolen Vehicle Assistance .................... 247 , 254
Stop/Start......................................................105
Storage ..................................................... 79 , 80
Console .......................................................80
Storage Compartment, Center Seat .................80
Storage, Vehicle ......................................64 , 407
Store Radio Presets ...................................... 207
Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 407
Stuck, Freeing ............................................... 356
Sun Roof ...................................................68 , 70
Closing.........................................................68
Opening .......................................................68
Sun Visor .........................................................81
Sun Visor Extension .........................................45
Sunshade Operation ........................................68
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .... 296
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 273
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 372
System, Remote Starting .................................20
T
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC)
.............63
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................................75
Time Delay
Headlight .....................................................48
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 392
Tire Markings ................................................ 388
Tire Safety Information ................................. 388
Tire Service Kit ......... 344, 345, 346, 350, 351
Tires .................................. 326 , 395, 400, 406
Aging (Life Of Tires) ................................... 398
Air Pressure .............................................. 395
Chains ...................................................... 403
Changing .................................................. 339
Compact Spare ......................................... 401
General Information ........................ 395 , 400
High Speed ............................................... 396
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 396
Jacking...................................................... 339
Life Of Tires .............................................. 398
Load Capacity ........................................... 392
Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ............................ 103 , 279
Quality Grading ......................................... 406
Radial ....................................................... 397
Replacement ............................................ 398
Rotation .................................................... 405
Safety ..............................................388 , 395
Sizes ......................................................... 389
Snow Tires ................................................ 400
Spare Tires ......................................400 , 401
Spinning ................................................... 397
Trailer Towing ........................................... 169
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 398
Wheel Nut Torque ..................................... 411
To Open Hood ..................................................71
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 168
Torque Converter Clutch ............................... 120
11
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 431
432
Towing
........................................ 163 , 167, 357
Disabled Vehicle ........................................357
Recreational ..............................................172
Towing Behind A Motorhome .........................172
Traction Control .............................................272
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .............................273
Trailer Towing ................................................163
Hitches ......................................................166
Minimum Requirements ............................168
Tips ...........................................................171
Trailer And Tongue Weight .............. 167 , 168
Wiring ........................................................170
Trailer Towing Guide ......................................167
Trailer Weight ................................................167
Transaxle
Automatic
..................................................114
Operation ..................................................114
Transmission .................................................115
Automatic ........................................ 115 , 387
Maintenance .............................................387
Transporting Pets ..........................................324
Tread Wear Indicators ...................................398
Turn Signals .....................................45 , 49, 105
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features
................................. 220
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
................................... 224
Uconnect Settings .......................................22
Uconnect App ............................................... 234
Uconnect Phone .........................215 , 216, 217
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
............................ 222
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress ................ 222
Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 226
Call Continuation ...................................... 224
Call Controls ............................................. 221
Call Termination ....................................... 223
Cancel Command ..................................... 216
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing ............... 218
Help Command ......................................... 215
Join Calls .................................................. 223
Making A Phone Or Audio Device
A Favorite
............................................. 219
Making A Second Call While Current
Call Is In Progress
................................. 223
Managing Your Favorites .......................... 220
Natural Speech ......................................... 215
Operation .................................................. 215
Overview ................................................... 213
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A
Mobile Phone ....................................... 216
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio
Device
.................................................. 217
Phonebook Download ............................... 219
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ............... 223
Power-Up .................................................. 226
Recent Calls.............................................. 221
Redial ....................................................... 223
To Remove A Favorite ............................... 220
Toggling Between Calls ............................. 223
Touch-Tone Number Entry ........................ 221
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone .. 224
Voice Command ....................................... 224
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features
.......22, 26
Passive Entry Programming .........................26
Uconnect System .......................................... 196
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 406
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....76
Universal Transmitter .......................................76
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .................... 289
USB ..................................................................81
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 432
433
V
Vanity Mirrors
..................................................45
Vehicle Finder ...................................... 245 , 253
Vehicle Health Alert .......................................248
Vehicle Health Report ....................................248
Vehicle Loading ................................... 162 , 392
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .................... 10
Vehicle Notifications ......................................249
Vehicle Storage ......................................64 , 407
Ventilated Seats .............................................. 38
Voice Command ............................42 , 228, 230
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................ 42
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)
................................................. 101
Warnings And Cautions ....................................10
Warnings, Roll Over ........................................... 9
Warranty Information .................................... 422
Washers, Windshield .................................... 370
Washing Vehicle ........................................... 408
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......................... 402
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 402
Wi-fi............................................................... 246
Wind Buffeting .................................................67
Window Fogging ...............................................65
Windows ..........................................................66
Power...........................................................66
Windshield Defroster .................................... 325
Windshield Washers ........................................51
Fluid.......................................................... 370
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 378
Windshield Wipers ................................. 51 , 370
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 378
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................51
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................53
11
21_KL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 433
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
2021 CHEROKEE
OWNER’S MANUAL
21_KL_OM_EN_USC
First Edition
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2021 CHEROKEE
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
